U375 Everest ASEAN 2018 TEC OM enPHI JB3B19A321EKA.v1 2

FORD EVEREST Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.

Part Number: JB3B 19A321 EKA 201803 20180306213900
Table of Contents
Introduction Passive Key Backup Position ....................33

About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7 MyKey™
Data Recording .................................................9 Principle of Operation .................................34
Replacement Parts Recommendation Creating a MyKey ...........................................35
...........................................................................10 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................36
Special Notices ...............................................10 Checking MyKey System Status ..............37
Mobile Communications Equipment MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................38
.............................................................................11
Doors and Locks
At a Glance Locking and Unlocking ................................39
Instrument Panel Overview ........................12
Liftgate
Child Safety Manual Liftgate ..............................................42
General Information ......................................15 Power Liftgate ................................................43
Installing Child Restraints ...........................16
Child Restraint Positioning .........................19 Security
Child Safety Locks ..........................................21 Passive Anti-Theft System .......................46
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................46
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ..................................22 Steering Wheel
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................22 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ..................48
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................24 Audio Control .................................................48
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................24 Voice Control ..................................................49
Cruise Control .................................................49
Supplementary Restraints Information Display Control .....................49
System
Principle of Operation .................................26 Wipers and Washers
Driver Airbag ....................................................26
Windshield Wipers .........................................51
Passenger Airbag ...........................................27
Autowipers ........................................................51
Side Airbags .....................................................27
Windshield Washers ....................................52
Driver Knee Airbag .........................................27
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........52
Side Curtain Airbags ....................................28
Lighting
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information .....................................54
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................29 Lighting Control .............................................54
Remote Control .............................................29 Autolamps .......................................................55
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................55
...........................................................................33 Daytime Running Lamps ...........................56
Everest (TEC) Vehicles Built From: 21-05-2018, JB3B 19A321 EKA enPHI, Edition date: 201803, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Automatic High Beam Control ................56 Seats

Front Fog Lamps ............................................57 Sitting in the Correct Position ................108
Rear Fog Lamps ............................................58 Head Restraints ...........................................108
Headlamp Leveling - Vehicles With: Manual Seats .................................................110
Manual Headlamp Leveling ..................58
Power Seats .....................................................111
Headlamp Leveling - Vehicles With:
Automatic Headlamp Leveling ............58 Rear Seats .......................................................112
Direction Indicators ......................................58 Heated Seats .................................................116
Interior Lamps ................................................59
Ambient Lighting ..........................................60
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points .................................117
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................62 Storage Compartments
Global Opening and Closing .....................65 Glove Box .........................................................119
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................65 Center Console ..............................................119
Interior Mirror ...................................................67 Overhead Console ........................................119
Sun Visors ........................................................67
Moonroof ..........................................................67
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
Instrument Cluster General Information ...................................120
Ignition Switch ..............................................120
Gauges ..............................................................69
Keyless Starting .............................................121
Warning Lamps and Indicators .................71
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without:
Audible Warnings and Indicators .............75 Push Button Start .....................................121
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With:
Information Displays Push Button Start ....................................122
General Information ......................................77 Starting a Diesel Engine ............................122
Clock ..................................................................83 Switching Off the Engine ..........................123
Trip Computer ................................................83
Personalized Settings .................................84 Unique Driving Characteristics
Information Messages ................................85
Auto-Start-Stop - Automatic
Climate Control Transmission .............................................124
Manual Climate Control .............................98
Automatic Climate Control .....................100 Fuel and Refueling
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate Safety Precautions ......................................126
.........................................................................102 Fuel Quality ....................................................126
Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........104 Running Out of Fuel ....................................127
Heated Rear Window ................................106 Refueling .........................................................128
Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................106
Cabin Air Filter ...............................................107
Table of Contents
Transmission Using Cruise Control ...................................156

Manual Transmission ................................130 Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................157
Automatic Transmission ..........................130
Driving Aids
Four-Wheel Drive Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control ...........................................163
Principle of Operation ................................136
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................136 Control .........................................................165
Driver Alert ......................................................167
Rear Axle Lane Keeping System ................................169
Electronic Locking Differential ................137 Blind Spot Information System ..............173
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................175
Brakes Traffic Sign Recognition .............................177
General Information ...................................138 Steering ...........................................................178
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes Pre-Collision Assist .....................................179
.........................................................................138
Parking Brake ................................................139
Load Carrying
Hill Start Assist .............................................139
General Information ...................................184
Traction Control Roof Racks and Load Carriers ................184
Principle of Operation .................................141
Towing
Using Traction Control ................................141
Towing a Trailer ............................................186
Stability Control Recommended Towing Weights ...........186
Tow Ball ..........................................................188
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......189
Using Stability Control ...............................143
Hill Descent Control Driving Hints

Breaking-In ....................................................190
Reduced Engine Performance ...............190
Using Hill Descent Control .......................144
Off-Road Driving .........................................190
Parking Aids Cold Weather Precautions .......................195
Driving Through Water ...............................195
Principle of Operation ...............................146
Floor Mats ......................................................195
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................146
Front Parking Aid ..........................................147
Roadside Emergencies
Active Park Assist ........................................148
Hazard Flashers ............................................197
Rear View Camera .......................................152
Fire Extinguisher ...........................................197
Cruise Control Warning Triangle ..........................................197
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................197
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................198
Table of Contents
Post-Crash Alert System ........................200 Vehicle Care

Transporting the Vehicle .........................200 Cleaning the Exterior ..................................237
Towing Points ...............................................201 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
.........................................................................237
Fuses Cleaning the Interior ..................................238
Fuse Box Locations ....................................202 Cleaning Leather Seats ............................239
Fuse Specification Chart .........................203 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............240
Changing a Fuse ..........................................216 Vehicle Storage ...........................................240
Maintenance Wheels and Tires

General Information ...................................218 General Information ..................................242
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............218 Tire Care .........................................................242
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L TDCi Using Snow Chains ....................................247
Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........247
/2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
(YM) .............................................................219 Changing a Road Wheel ...........................251
Under Hood Overview - 2.2L Diesel ......220 Technical Specifications ..........................256
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Diesel ......222
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L TDCi Bi-Turbo Capacities and Specifications
Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L
TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) (YM) Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi
........................................................................224 Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN)
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Diesel/3.2L ........................................................................258
Diesel ...........................................................224 Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi Diesel
Engine Oil Check .........................................224 (132 kW/180 PS) (YM) .........................259
Engine Coolant Check ...............................225 Engine Specifications - 2.2L Diesel ......260
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check ................226 Engine Specifications - 3.2L Diesel .......261
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................226 Vehicle Dimensions ...................................262
Washer Fluid Check ...................................226 Vehicle Identification Plate .....................264
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.0L Vehicle Identification Number ...............264
TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
(YN) /2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS)
PS) (YM), 2.0L Diesel ............................227 (YN) , 2.0L Diesel ...................................265
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.2L Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Diesel/3.2L Diesel ...................................227 TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS) (YM)
Changing the 12V Battery ........................228 ........................................................................267
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................230 Capacities and Specifications - 2.2L
Diesel ..........................................................269
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................230
Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Removing a Headlamp ..............................231 Diesel ...........................................................272
Changing a Bulb ...........................................231 Bulb Specification Chart ..........................274
Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............236 Vehicle Performance Specifications
.........................................................................277
Table of Contents
Audio System
General Information ..................................278
Audio Unit ......................................................279
Radio ................................................................281
Audio Input Jack ...........................................281
USB Port ........................................................282
Media Hub .....................................................282
Audio Troubleshooting .............................282
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................284
Home Screen ...............................................288
Using Voice Recognition ..........................290
Entertainment .............................................295
Climate ..........................................................300
Phone .............................................................304
Navigation .....................................................309
Apps ..................................................................312
Settings ...........................................................313
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................325
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............339
End User License Agreement ..................341
Type Approvals ............................................367
6
Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
®
Note: Pass on this manual when selling AdBlue System
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle. E211760
Battery
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Battery acid
Introduction
Brake fluid - non petroleum Fasten seatbelt

based
E71880
Brake system Front airbag

E67017
Cabin air filter Front fog lamps
Check fuel cap Fuse compartment
Child safety door lock or unlock Hazard flashers
Child seat lower anchor Heated rear window
Child seat tether anchor Heated windshield

E91392
Interior luggage compartment

Cruise control release
E71340
Jack
Do not open when hot
Lighting control
Engine air filter
Lock rear window

Engine coolant
Low tire pressure warning

Engine coolant temperature
Maintain correct fluid level

Engine oil
Panic alarm
Explosive gas
Parking aid
Fan warning
E139213
Introduction
Parking brake In general, this technical information

documents the condition of parts,
modules, systems or the environment:
Power steering fluid • Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
• Status messages of the vehicle and its
Power windows front/rear individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
deceleration, lateral acceleration).
Service engine soon • Malfunctions and defects in important
system components (e.g. lighting and
brake system).
Side airbag • Vehicle reactions in particular driving
situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
Stability control system).
• Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).
Windshield wash and wipe
These data are exclusively technical and
help identification and correction of
malfunctions as well as optimisation of
Keep out of reach of children vehicle functions. Motion profiles indicating
travelled routes cannot be created with
E161353
these data.
Recyclable product
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
E161307 service processes, warranty cases, quality
Do not dispose of in the trash assurance), employees of the service
because the material contains network (including manufacturers) are
E161354 lead able to read out this technical information
from the event and malfunction data
Use safety glasses when storage modules using special diagnostic
handling devices. If required, you will receive further
E161305 information. After a malfunction has been
corrected, these data are deleted from the
malfunction storage module or they are
DATA RECORDING constantly overwritten.
A large number of electronic components When using the vehicle, situations may
of your vehicle contain data storage occur in which these technical data related
modules temporarily or permanently to other information (accident report,
storing technical data about the condition damages on the vehicle, witness
of the vehicle, events and malfunctions. statements, etc.) may be associated with
a specific person - possibly, with the
assistance of an expert.
Introduction
Additional functions contractually agreed Collision Repairs

upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location
in emergency cases) allow the We hope that you never experience a
transmission of particular vehicle data collision, but accidents do happen.
from the vehicle. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
Note: Do not connect wireless plug-in finish, structural integrity, corrosion
devices to the data link connector. protection and dent resistance. During
Unauthorized third parties could gain access vehicle development we validate that
to vehicle data and impair the performance these parts deliver the intended level of
of safety related systems. Only allow repair protection as a whole system. A great way
facilities that follow our service and repair to know for sure you are getting this level
instructions to connect their equipment to of protection is to use genuine Ford
the data link connector. replacement collision parts.
REPLACEMENT PARTS Warranty on Replacement Parts

RECOMMENDATION Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
We have built your vehicle to the highest benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
standards using quality parts. We Warranty may not cover damage caused
recommend that you demand the use of to your vehicle as a result of failed
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts non-Ford parts. For additional information,
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled refer to the terms and conditions of the
maintenance or repair. You can clearly Ford Warranty.
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
SPECIAL NOTICES
packaging.
If converting or modifying your vehicle from
Scheduled Maintenance and production specification, please see your
Mechanical Repairs authorised Ford dealer.
One of the best ways for you to make sure

that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
10
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
11
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Right-hand drive
E266443
A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

Cruise Control (page 49).
B Multi-function display. See
General Information (page G Direction indicators. See
77). Direction Indicators (page 58).
C Windshield wipers. See Wipers H Lighting control. See Lighting
and Washers (page 51). Control (page 54).
D Audio control. See Audio I Hood release lever. See
Control (page 48). Voice Opening and Closing the
control. See Voice Control Hood (page 218).
(page 49). J Ignition switch. See Ignition
E Instrument cluster. See Switch (page 120).
Instrument Cluster (page 69).
12
At a Glance
K Steering wheel adjustment lever. M Rear climate control. See

See Adjusting the Steering Climate Control (page 98).
Wheel (page 48). N Climate control. See Climate
L Horn. Control (page 98).
Left-hand drive
E266442
A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See

Instrument Cluster (page 69).
B Multi-function display. See
General Information (page F Cruise control switches. See
77). Cruise Control (page 49).
C Windshield wipers. See Wipers G Direction indicators. See
and Washers (page 51). Direction Indicators (page 58).
D Audio control. See Audio H Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 48). Voice Control (page 54).
control. See Voice Control I Hood release lever. See
(page 49). Opening and Closing the
Hood (page 218).
13
At a Glance
J Ignition switch. See Ignition

Switch (page 120).
K Steering wheel adjustment lever.
See Adjusting the Steering
Wheel (page 48).
L Horn.
M Rear climate control. See
Climate Control (page 98).
N Climate control. See Climate
Control (page 98).
14
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

Always make sure your child is
See the following sections for directions secured properly in a device that is
on how to properly use safety restraints appropriate for their height, age and
for children. weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Type
Infants or Children weighing 18 kg or less (generally Use a child safety seat

toddlers age four or younger). (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a belt-positioning
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener- booster seat.
ally children who are less than 1.45 m, are
greater than age four and less than age
12, and between 18–36 kg and upward to
45 kg if recommended by child restraint
manufacturer).
Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
1.45 m tall or greater than 36 kg or 45 kg shoulder belt centered
if recommended by child restraint manu- across the shoulder and
facturer). chest, and seat backrest
upright.
Note: When possible, always properly

restrain children 12 years of age and under
in a rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in a front seating
position.
15
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD WARNINGS

RESTRAINTS Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle. Failure
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the child restraints
checked.
Note: Read and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions when you are installing a child
E161855
restraint.
Note: Mandatory use of child restraints
varies from country to country.
Only child restraints certified to ECE-R129
or ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested
and approved for use in your vehicle. A
choice of these are available from an
authorized dealer.
Child Restraints for Different Mass

Groups
Use the correct child restraint as follows:
Baby Safety Seat
E68916
WARNINGS
Secure children that are less than
150 cm tall in an approved child
restraint on the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Never use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur.
Do not modify child restraints in any
way.
E68918
Do not hold a child on your lap when
your vehicle is moving. Secure children that weigh less than 13 kg
in a rearward facing baby safety seat
(Group 0+) on the rear seat.
16
Child Safety
Child Safety Seat WARNINGS

You must reinstall the head restraint
following the removal of the child
restraint.
See Head Restraints (page 108).

Note: When using a child restraint on a rear
seat, adjust the front seat in a position to
prevent contact with the rear passenger,
child feet or child legs.
Booster Seat (Group 2)

E68920
Secure children that weigh between 13 kg

and 18 kg in a child safety seat (Group 1)
on the rear seat.
Booster Seats
WARNINGS
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with only the lap
strap of the seatbelt.
Do not install a booster seat or a E70710
booster cushion with a seatbelt that
is slack or twisted. Secure children that weigh more than 15 kg
but are less than 150 cm tall in a booster
Do not put the shoulder section of seat or a booster cushion.
the seatbelt or allow the child to put
the shoulder section of the seatbelt We recommend that you use a booster
under their arm or behind their back. Failure seat that combines a cushion with a
to follow this instruction could reduce the backrest instead of a booster cushion only.
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase The raised seating position will allow you
the risk of injury or death in a crash. to position the shoulder strap of the adult
seatbelt over the center of your child’s
Do not use pillows, books or towels shoulder and the lap strap tightly across
to boost your child's height. Failure its hips.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
When using a child restraint on a rear
seat, the child restraint must rest
tightly against the vehicle seat. It
must not touch the head restraint. If
necessary remove the head restraint.
17
Child Safety
Booster Cushion (Group 3) Top Tether Anchor Points
E68924
ISOFIX Anchor Points

E213627
WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device when There are two child restraint anchor points
using the ISOFIX system. We on the second row outermost seating
recommend the use of a top tether positions. A third child restraint anchor
or support leg. point may be available on the center
seating position.
Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX
seat, make sure that you know the correct
mass group and ISOFIX size class for the
intended seating locations.
See Child Restraint Positioning (page
19).
Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that
accommodate universally approved
ISOFIX child restraints.
The ISOFIX system has two rigid
attachment arms on the child restraint that
attach to anchor points on the outboard
second row seats, where the cushion and
backrest meet. Tether anchor points are
located behind the outboard second row E87146
seats for child restraints with a top tether.
Attaching a Child Restraint with
Top Tethers
WARNINGS
Do not attach a tether strap to
anything other than the correct
tether anchor point.
18
Child Safety
WARNINGS 3. Tighten the tether strap in line with the

Make sure that the top tether strap child restraint manufacturer's
is not slack or twisted and is properly instructions.
located on the anchor point.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Note: Where applicable, remove the POSITIONING
luggage cover to ease installation.
1. Route the tether strap to the anchor WARNINGS
point. EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front
of it!
If you use a child restraint and a
seatbelt, make sure that the seatbelt
is not slack or twisted.
When using a child restraint on a rear
seat, the child restraint must rest
tightly against the vehicle seat. It
must not touch the head restraint. If
necessary remove the head restraint.
See Head Restraints (page 108).

Note: See an authorized dealer for the
E87145
latest details relating to our recommended
2. Push the child restraint back firmly to child restraints.
engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
Mass Group Categories
Seating Positions 0 0+ 1 2 3
0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

Front passenger seat
X X UF¹ UF¹ UF¹
with airbag
Rear seats U U U U U
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraints approved for use in this
mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved
child restraint, on the rear seat.
19
Child Safety
Note: When using a child restraint on a

front seat, always adjust the front
passenger's seat to its fully rearward
position. If it proves difficult to tighten the
lap section of the safety belt without slack
remaining, adjust the seat backrest to the
fully upright position and raise the height of
the seat. See Seats (page 108).
ISOFIX Child Restraints

Mass Group Categories
0+ 1
Seating Positions
Rear facing Forward facing
0–13 kg 9–18 kg
Front seat Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
Seat type
nd
2 Row outermost seat Size class C, D, E
1
A, B, B1, C, D
1
ISOFIX
Seat type IL
2
IL, IUF
3
nd
2 Row center seat and 3
rd Size class
Not ISOFIX equipped
row seats Seat type
IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems of the semi-universal category.
Please consult child restraint systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraint systems of universal category
approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.
1
The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraint systems is
defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX
child restraint.
2
At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax
Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our
recommended child restraints.
3
At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child restraint is the Britax Romer
Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended child
restraints.
20
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)
WARNING
You cannot open the rear doors from
inside if you have put the child safety
locks on.
E132612
The childproof locks are on the rear edge

of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
21
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

No modifications or additions should
WARNINGS be made by the user which will either
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient prevent the seatbelt adjusting
distance between yourself and the devices from operating to remove slack or
steering wheel. Only when you use prevent the seatbelt assembly from being
the seatbelt properly, can it hold you in adjusted to remove slack.
position to achieve its optimum effect.
Never use a seatbelt for more than Note: Position the shoulder strap of the
one person. It is dangerous to put a seatbelt over the center of your shoulder
belt around a child being carried on and position the lap strap tightly across your
the occupant's lap. hips.
Use the correct buckle for each Status After a Crash
seatbelt.
WARNING
Do not use a seatbelt that is slack or
twisted. Seatbelts subjected to strain, as a
result of an accident, should be
Do not wear thick clothing. The renewed and the anchorages
seatbelt must fit tightly around your checked by a properly trained technician.
body to achieve its optimum effect.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The driver and front passenger seatbelt
systems are fitted with a seatbelt
WARNINGS
pretensioner. Seatbelt pretensioners have
a lower deployment threshold than the Make sure that the seatbelts are
airbags. During minor collisions, it is securely stowed away when not in
possible that only the seatbelt use and not outside your vehicle
pretensioners will deploy. when closing the doors.
WARNINGS Seatbelts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with
Avoid contamination of the webbing comfort, to provide the protection
with polishes, oils, chemicals and for which they have been designed. A loose
particularly battery acid. Use mild belt will greatly reduce the protection
soap and water for cleaning the webbing. afforded to the wearer.
If webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
or damaged, replace the belt. Avoid contamination of the webbing
with polishes, oils, chemicals and
If your vehicle is involved in a crash, particularly battery acid. Use mild
have the seatbelts and associated soap and water for cleaning the webbing.
components inspected as soon as If webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
possible. Failure to follow this instruction or damaged, replace the belt.
could result in personal injury or death.
Never use a seatbelt for more than
one person. It is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
22
Seatbelts
WARNINGS Second-Row Seats

You must replace the seatbelt if the
automatic locking retractor or any
other seatbelt function is not
operating correctly. Failure to replace the
seatbelt and retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Never use a seatbelt for more than
one person. It is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
Do not use a seatbelt that is slack or
twisted.
No modifications or additions should
be made by the user which will either
prevent the seatbelt adjusting E200940
devices from operating to remove slack or

prevent the seatbelt assembly from being Third-Row Seats (If Equipped)
adjusted to remove slack.
Note: Make sure that the seatbelt tongue

is properly fastened in the seatbelt buckle.
Front Seats
E200941
Pull the seatbelt out steadily. It may lock

if you pull it sharply or if your vehicle is on
a slope.
The second-row center seatbelt can lock
if you return the seat backrest from a
folded position to the upright position
E74124 forcefully. If the seatbelt locks, recline the
seat using the recline adjustment.
See Rear Seats (page 112).
23
Seatbelts
Press the red button on the buckle to

release the seatbelt. Hold the tongue and
let it retract completely and smoothly to
its stowed position.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy

WARNING
Position the seatbelt correctly for
your safety and that of your unborn
child. Do not use only the lap strap
or the shoulder strap.
E131388
To adjust the shoulder belt height:

1. Pull the locking button and slide the
height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their SEATBELT REMINDER

seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low WARNING
across the hips below the belly and worn The system will only provide
as tight as comfort allows. Position the protection when you use the seatbelt
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the correctly.
shoulder and the center of the chest.
The warning lamp illuminates and an
SEATBELT HEIGHT audible warning will sound when the
ADJUSTMENT (If Equipped) following conditions have been met:
• The front seatbelts have not been
WARNING fastened.
Position the seatbelt height adjuster • Your vehicle exceeds a relatively low
so that the seatbelt rests across the speed.
middle of your shoulder. Failure to It will also illuminate when a front seatbelt
adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce is unfastened when your vehicle is moving.
its effectiveness and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
24
Seatbelts
If you do not fasten your seatbelt both the

audible and visual warnings will switch off
automatically after approximately 5
minutes.
Switching the Seatbelt Minder Off

Contact an authorized dealer.
25
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

Do not use accessory seat covers.
WARNINGS The use of accessory seat covers
Extreme Hazard! Never use a may prevent the deployment of the
rearward facing child restraint on a side airbags and increase the risk of injury
seat protected by an active airbag in in an accident.
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur. Note: A loud bang sounds and there is a
Do not modify the front of your cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
vehicle in any way. This could airbag deploys. This is normal.
adversely affect deployment of the Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning cloth.
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
DRIVER AIRBAG
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. Failure to adhere to
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and
seatbelts must be carried out by an
authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in serious personal E151127
injury or death.
Keep the areas in front of the airbags The airbag will deploy during significant
free from obstruction. Do not affix frontal collisions. The airbag will inflate
anything to or over the airbag covers. within a few thousandths of a second and
Objects could become projectiles during deflate on contact with the occupant, thus
airbag deployment. Failure to follow this cushioning forward body movement.
instruction could result in personal injury During minor frontal collisions, overturns,
or death. rear collisions and side collisions, the
airbag will not deploy.
Do not poke sharp objects into areas
where airbags are fitted. This could
damage and adversely affect
deployment of the airbags. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
26
PASSENGER AIRBAG (If Equipped) SIDE AIRBAGS (If Equipped)
E72658
Side airbags are inside the seat backrest

E74302 of the front seats. A label indicates that
side airbags are in your vehicle.
The side airbag deploys during significant
The airbag will deploy during significant lateral crashes. The airbag inflates within
frontal collisions or collisions that are up a few thousandths of a second and
to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The deflates on contact with the occupants,
airbag will inflate within a few thousandths thus providing protection for the chest and
of a second and deflate on contact with shoulder areas. During minor lateral
the occupant, thus cushioning forward crashes, overturns, front crashes and rear
body movement. During minor frontal crashes, the side airbags will not deploy.
collisions, overturns, rear collisions and
side collisions, the airbag will not deploy.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to open the airbag
cover.
The knee airbag is under the instrument

panel. The system works along with the
front airbags to help reduce injury to the
legs. When the airbags activate in a crash,
the knee airbag deploys from under the
instrument panel. As with front and side
airbags, it is important to be properly
seated and restrained to reduce the risk of
death or serious injury.
27
Note: The airbag has a lower deployment

threshold than the front airbags. During a
minor crash, it is possible that only the knee
airbag deploys.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (If

Equipped)
WARNING
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
E75004
The airbags are above the front and rear

side windows.
The airbag is designed to deploy during a
significant lateral or frontal angled crash.
The airbag is not designed to deploy during
a minor lateral and frontal crash, rear crash
or a vehicle rollover.
28
GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE CONTROL

RADIO FREQUENCIES
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Note: Changes or modifications not Equipped)
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
authority to operate the equipment. unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
The typical operating range for your transmitter functions as a programmed
transmitter is approximately 10 m. ignition key that operates all the locks and
A decrease in operating range could be starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
caused by: control.
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the E191532
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can Press the button to release the key blade.
lock and unlock the doors with the key. Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a

security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
29
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E258629
Press the release button and pull the key

blade out.
E258628
The intelligent access keys operate the

power locks. The key must be in your
vehicle to use the push button start.
Removable Key Blade

The intelligent access key also contains a E151795
removable key blade that you can use to
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
unlock your vehicle.
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
30
A message appears in the information

display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
77).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E191533
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.

6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2450 or
equivalent.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
31
E258629
1. Push the release button and pull the

key blade out.
E218401
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden

behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
32
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 46).
PASSIVE KEY BACKUP

POSITION
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
E272540
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key Place the passive key in the position
blade. shown, with the buttons facing upward.
Make sure that you place the key fob in the
Car Finder center of the cup holder.
Press the button twice within The top or bottom end of the key must be
three seconds. The horn sounds pointing towards the front or rear of the
E138623 and the direction indicators vehicle.
flash.
With the key in this position, press the
brake or clutch pedal, then press the start
Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped) button to switch on your vehicle.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
E138624 switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
33
MyKey™ (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Driver assist features, if equipped on

your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
MyKey allows you to program keys with blind spot information system (BLIS),
restricted driving modes to promote good cross traffic alert, lane departure
driving habits. All but one of the keys warning and forward collision warning
programmed to the vehicle can be system.
activated with these restricted modes. • Satellite radio adult content
Any keys that have not been programmed restrictions (available only in some
are referred to as administrator keys or markets).
admin keys. They can be used to: Note: When you switch lane departure
• Create a MyKey. warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features. Configurable Settings
When you have programmed a MyKey, you With an admin key, you can configure
can access the following information using certain MyKey settings when you first
the information display: create a MyKey and before you recycle the
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are key or restart the vehicle. You can also
programmed to your vehicle. change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey. • A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the followed by an audible tone when your
same settings. You cannot program them vehicle reaches the set speed. You
individually. cannot override the set speed by fully
Note: For vehicles equipped with a depressing the accelerator pedal or by
push-button start switch: When both a setting cruise control.
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes WARNING
the admin key only. Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
Non-configurable Settings driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
The following settings cannot be changed
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
by an admin key user:
always responsible to drive in accordance
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. with local laws and prevailing conditions.
You cannot disable this feature. The Failure to do so could result in accident or
audio system will mute when the front injury.
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
34
• Various vehicle speed reminders so you 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or

know when your vehicle approaches Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
the limits. Warnings appear in the equipped with these features).
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit. CREATING A MYKEY
• Audio system maximum volume of Use the information display to create a
45%. A message will be shown in the MyKey:
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the 1. Insert the key you want to program into
speed-sensitive or compensated the ignition.
automatic volume control will be 2. Switch the ignition on.
disabled.
3. Access the main menu on the
• Always on setting. When this is information display controls. Use the
selected, you will not be able to turn arrow keys to get to the following menu
off Advance Trac or traction control, selections:
Message Action and Description
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Create MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
When prompted, hold the OK button until Programming/Changing

you see a message informing you to label Configurable Settings
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start. Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
the admin keys. key or remote control.
You can also program configurable 2. Access the main menu on the
settings for the key(s). See information display controls. Use the
Programming/Changing Configurable arrow keys to get to the following menu
Settings. selections:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
35
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you You can clear or change your MyKey
have switched the vehicle off, however, you settings using the information display
will need an admin key to change or clear control on the steering wheel. See
your MyKey settings. Information Displays (page 77).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow button.
Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
36
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display
STATUS control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 77).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
37
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 35).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 35).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 46).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
38
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Locking the Doors

Press the button to lock all the
Power Door Locks doors. The direction indicators
The power door lock control is on the driver
E138623 flash.
and front passenger door panels. Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is not closed, or if the hood is
not closed on vehicles that have an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the
direction indicators do not flash.
Using Passive Entry (If Equipped)

General Information
E138628 You can unlock and lock the vehicle

without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your passive key is within
A Unlock.
1 m of your vehicle. Passive entry uses a
B Lock. sensor on the back of the door handle for
unlocking and a separate sensor on the
Remote Control face of each door handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
You can use the remote control at any time
your vehicle is not running. See Remote • The vehicle battery has no charge.
Control (page 29). • The key battery has no charge.
Unlocking the Doors • The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
Press the button to unlock all key is close to metal objects or electronic
doors. The direction indicators devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
Note: You can unlock the driver's door with the key blade to lock and unlock your
the key. Use the key when the remote vehicle. See Remote Control (page 29).
control is not functioning.
Note: When you leave your vehicle locked Unlocking Using Passive Entry
for several weeks, the remote control turns
off. Your vehicle must be unlocked with the
key and started. Unlocking and starting your
vehicle enables the remote control.
Reprogramming the Unlocking

E248555
Function
You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door is unlocked.
See Remote Control (page 29).
39
Doors and Locks
With your passive key within 1 m of your Autounlock

vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the
back of the door handle for a brief period Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
and then pull on the door handle to unlock, • The ignition is on, all the doors are
being careful to not touch the lock sensor closed, and your vehicle has been
at the same time or pulling the door handle moving at a speed greater than
too quickly. The system requires a brief 20 km/h.
delay to authenticate your passive key. • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
Locking Using Passive Entry
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
E248556
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
With your passive key within 1 m of your the driver door.
vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock
sensor for approximately one second to Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
lock, being careful to not touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle at You can enable or disable the autounlock
the same time. After locking, you can feature in the information display or an
immediately pull on the door handle to authorized dealer can do it for you. See
confirm locking occurred without General Information (page 77).
inadvertently unlocking. Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Note: Do not use the outside door handle with the Key
as a roof cargo strap.
Locking with the Key
Autolock (If Equipped)
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
Autolock locks all the doors when: your vehicle.
• All doors are closed. Unlocking with the Key
• The ignition is on.
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
• You shift into any gear putting your your vehicle.
vehicle in motion.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater you pull the interior handle, you only turn off
than 20 km/h. the emergency locking, not the child safety
Autolock repeats when: lock. You can only open the doors using the
• You open then close any door while the external door handle.
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
15 km/h or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 20 km/h.
40
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Opening the Luggage

with the Key - Vehicles with Compartment
Central Locking
Note: If the liftgate has been opened using
the key after the vehicle has been locked,
do not leave the key inside the vehicle and
close the liftgate as the key will be locked
inside.
With the Remote Control

Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630
From Outside Your Vehicle
E131448
Locking
If the central locking function fails to
operate, lock the doors individually by
inserting the key into the exterior door
handle key slot and rotating it.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
E206130
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock. Press the release button below the license
plate to unlatch the liftgate. Your vehicle
Unlocking must be unlocked or have a passive key
within 1 m of the liftgate.
If the central locking function fails to
operate, unlock the driver door and then
unlock all other doors individually by
pulling the interior door handles.
Note: If you unlock the doors using this
method, you must lock the doors individually
until you have the central locking function
repaired.
41
Liftgate
MANUAL LIFTGATE Opening the Liftgate

Manually Opening the Liftgate
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
Make sure that you fully close the E138632
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are Note: You must enable the manual liftgate
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the button before you can use it. Press the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air remote control unlock button twice within
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this a few seconds.
instruction could result in personal injury 1. Press the button inside the liftgate
or death. handle.
Make sure that you fully close the 2. Pull the liftgate upward.
liftgate to prevent passengers and
cargo from falling out. Failure to Closing the Liftgate
Note: Be careful when opening or closing

the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area, to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
driving. This could damage the liftgate and E155976
its components.
A handle is inside the liftgate to help with
closing.
42
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE The liftgate only operates with the

transmission in park (P).
WARNINGS Liftgate Switch
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
Make sure that you fully close the E129838
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are Switch the ignition on to operate
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the the liftgate using the center
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air console switch.
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this Note: A tone sounds three times when the
instruction could result in personal injury liftgate begins to close.
or death.
Five short tones indicate a malfunction
Make sure that you fully close the with the open or close request. The cause
liftgate to prevent passengers and of this could be one of the following:
cargo from falling out. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in • You switch the ignition on and the
personal injury or death. transmission selector lever is not in
park (P).
Keep keys out of reach of children. • The battery voltage is below the
Do not allow children to operate or minimum operating voltage.
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the • Your vehicle speed exceeds 4 km/h.
operation of the power liftgate at all times. To unlock a fully closed liftgate, you can
either:
Note: Do not operate the liftgate unless it • Press the button on the remote control
is free from obstruction. once.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate • Press the center console switch.
before operating or moving your vehicle,
To open a fully closed liftgate, you can
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
either:
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components. • Press the button on the remote control
twice within three seconds.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This • Press the center console switch.
could damage the liftgate and its • Use the liftgate switch.
components.
43
Liftgate
To fully open a partially opened liftgate,

you can either:
• Press the button on the remote control
twice within three seconds.
• Press the center console switch or the
liftgate switch.
• Use the liftgate switch.
To stop the liftgate, you can either:
• Press the button on the remote control.
A further remote control operation
delays for a few seconds. E206131

liftgate switch. The liftgate closes when it comes into
contact with the vehicle body.
• Use the liftgate switch.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
Closing the Liftgate
You can set the power liftgate height by
Note: Bounce-back does not work and it following the below steps.
does not detect obstacles when the liftgate
is in contact with the vehicle body. 1. Open the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave a passive key in your 2. Manually move the liftgate to the
vehicle when closing the liftgate. A message chosen height.
shows in the information display. See 3. Press and hold the liftgate switch for
Information Messages (page 85). at least three seconds. A tone sounds
when you have set the height.
Note: A recessed grip is located inside the
liftgate to help with closing. Using the Hands-Free Liftgate (If
You can either: Equipped)
• Press the button on the remote control

twice within three seconds. Make sure you have a passive key within
1 m of the liftgate.
liftgate switch. 1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
• Use the liftgate release switch.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
• Manually close the liftgate without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
3. The liftgate power opens or closes.
44
Liftgate
Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection and stop the power operation or
reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure,
or damage mechanical components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
passive key away from the rear bumper
detection area when you wash your vehicle.
E253664
The detection area is in the center of the

rear bumper.
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch
E253799
The detection area is on the left-hand side

and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.
Avoid the following actions when using
hands-free opening:
• Making physical contact with the
bumper.
• Holding your foot under the bumper.
• Sweeping your foot from side to side,
or kicking at an odd angle.
45
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT ANTI-THEFT ALARM

SYSTEM
Alarm System
Principle of Operation Your vehicle may have one or more of the
The system prevents someone from following alarm systems:
starting the engine with an incorrectly • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
coded key. • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors
and battery back-up sounder.
Coded Keys
• Inclination or motion sensor to set off
If you lose a key, you can purchase a the alarm if the vehicle is moved or
replacement from an authorized dealer. If raised.
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the Perimeter Alarm
original keys. You can also obtain extra
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
keys from an authorized dealer.
unauthorized access to your vehicle
Note: Have all of your remaining keys through the doors, luggage compartment
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have and the hood.
replacement keys coded together with
recoding your remaining keys. See an Panic Alarm (If Equipped)
authorized dealer for further information.
The alarm can be activated using the
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal remote control.
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognizing a coded key. Interior Sensors
Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine
immobilizer will arm automatically after a
short time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine
immobilizer will disarm automatically if a E133698
correctly coded key is used.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
If you are unable to start the engine with a unauthorized access by sensing any
correctly coded key, have your vehicle movement within your vehicle.
checked by an authorized dealer.
Arming the alarm turns on the interior
sensors.
Note: Do not cover the interior lamp
scanning sensors.
46
Security
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard Reduced Guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle, as this could In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
trigger the alarm. off when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not leave the glasses holder open. Note: You can set the alarm to reduce
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Note: To permanently switch off the interior
motion sensor, see an authorized dealer. Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false Full guard is the standard setting.
alarms.
You can switch this feature on or off and
Inclination or Motion Sensor adjust the settings using the information
display.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
elevation of your vehicle. Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Triggering the Alarm Note: The alarm resets to full guard the
next time you unlock and then relock the
• If someone opens a door or the hood
vehicle with the remote control.
without a valid key or remote control.
• If you switch the ignition on without a Arming the Alarm
valid key.
Press the lock button once to lock your
• If the interior sensors detect movement vehicle and arm the alarm.
within your vehicle.
• On vehicles with a battery back-up Disarming the Alarm
sounder, if someone disconnects your
vehicle battery or the battery back-up Disarm the alarm by any of the following
sounder itself. actions:
If the alarm sounds, the alarm horn sounds • Unlock the doors with the key and
for 30 seconds and the hazard warning switch the ignition on with a correctly
lamps flash for five minutes. coded key within 12 seconds.
• Unlock the doors or luggage
Any further attempts to carry out one of compartment using the remote control.
the above will sound the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle or if you are
transporting the vehicle as this could trigger
the alarm.
47
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 108).
2
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
1
E176972
1. Unlock the steering column. A

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired C
position.
E
B
D
E199065
A Volume up.
B Seek down or previous.
C Seek up or next.
48
Steering Wheel
Type Two
D Mute.
E Volume down.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
C
E248386
B See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 157).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
E200787 CONTROL
A Voice recognition.
B Answer phone call.
C End phone call.
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)

Type One
E205893
E201284
See Using Cruise Control (page 156).

E201420
49
Steering Wheel
Use the controls to adjust the information

display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See General
Information (page 77).
50
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe
Push the lever up or down to

operate the windshield wiper.
E270969
E197526
A Shortest wipe interval.

E197525 B Intermittent wipe.
A Single wipe. C Longest wipe interval.
B Intermittent wipe. Use the rotary control to adjust the

C Normal wipe. intermittent wipe interval.
D High speed wipe. Speed Dependent Wipers

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before When your vehicle speed increases, the
you switch the windshield wipers on. interval between wipes decreases.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
windshield, clean the windshield and the you switch the windshield wipers on.
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
issue, install new wiper blades.
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
windshield, clean the windshield and the
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
motor to burn out. Always use the
issue, install new wiper blades.
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield. Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
51
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E197526
A High sensitivity. E197528
B On. Pull the lever toward you to

C Low sensitivity. E270967
operate the windshield washers.
Use the rotary control to adjust the When you release the lever, the wipers
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you operate for a short time. When activated,
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after
when the sensor detects a large amount the wipers stop to clear any remaining
of water on the windshield. When you washer fluid.
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
of water on the windshield. off in the information display See
Information Messages (page 85).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the Note: Do not operate the washers when
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects the washer reservoir is empty. This could
hit the windshield. cause the washer pump to overheat.
In these conditions, you can do the Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers Operating the windshield washer also turns
to reduce the amount of smearing on on the front camera washer.
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
• Switch autowipers off. WASHERS
Autowipers Settings Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch it off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
52
Wipers and Washers
E171615
A Intermittent wipe.
B Low speed wipe.
C Off.
Depending on your vehicle, when you

switch on the front wipers and move the
gearshift lever to reverse (R), the rear
intermittent wipe may turn on.
Rear Window Washer
E167407
Push the lever away from you to operate

the rear window washer.
When you release the lever, wiping
continues for a short period of time.
53
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist E142449
can form on the interior of the lens. The

fine mist eventually clears and exits A Lamps off.
through the vents during normal operation. B Parking lamps, instrument panel
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours lamps, license plate lamps and
under dry weather conditions. tail lamps.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: C Headlamps.
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets). Headlamp High Beam
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E162679
Push the lever away from you to

switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the

lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
54
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
E162680 headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
Slightly pull the lever toward you and approximately 60 seconds after you switch
release it to flash the headlamps. the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) wipers:
• During a single wipe.
WARNING • When using the windshield washers.
The system does not relieve you of • If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
your responsibility to drive with due
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
care and attention. You may need to
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
override the system if it does not turn the
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: When disconnecting the battery or
when it runs out of charge, the illuminated
components turn to the maximum setting.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the

autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
55
Lighting
Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If

Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight

conditions.
E231828
To switch the system on, switch the
Press repeatedly or press and hold until lighting control to any position except
you reach the desired level. headlamps.
Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
A B CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark

E165366 enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
A Press repeatedly or press and headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
hold to dim. ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
B Press repeatedly or press and Low beams remain on.
hold to brighten.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
56
Lighting
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for

example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
E142451
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle, Switch the lighting control to the
continuously monitors conditions to turn autolamps position. See Autolamps
the high beams on and off. (page 55).
Once the system is active, the high beams Overriding the System
turn on if:
When you switch on the high beams,
• The ambient light level is low enough. pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
• There is no traffic in front of your temporary override to low beam.
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than Automatic High Beam Indicator (If
approximately 40 km/h. Equipped)
The high beams turn off if: The indicator lamp illuminates
• The ambient light level is high enough to confirm when the system is
that high beams are not required. ready to assist.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 30 km/h.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
• You switch the rear fog lamps on.
Switching the System On and Off

Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
77).
E232249
Press to switch the fog lamps on or off.
57
Lighting
You can switch the fog lamps on when the

lighting control is in any position except
automatic high beam or off.
REAR FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

2
E132711
1. Press to release the control.

E232250 2. Rotate the control to the required
setting.
WARNING 3. Press to close the control.
Do not use the rear fog lamps when
it is raining or snowing and visibility HEADLAMP LEVELING -
is more than 50 m.
VEHICLES WITH: AUTOMATIC
Press to switch the fog lamps on or off. HEADLAMP LEVELING
You can switch the fog lamps on when This vehicle is equipped with a dynamic
either the front fog lamps or low beam automatic leveling system. The headlamps
headlamps are on. do not require additional aim adjustment.
HEADLAMP LEVELING - DIRECTION INDICATORS

VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Adjust the level of the headlamp beams
according to your vehicle load.
Set the headlamp leveling control to zero
when your vehicle is unloaded. Set the
headlamp beams to give between
35–100 m of road surface illumination
when your vehicle is partially or fully
loaded.
To adjust the level of the headlamp E162681
beams:
58
Lighting
Push the lever up or down to use the With Moonroof

direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote-control button.
• You press button A on the front interior
lamp. A B C A
E201210
Front Interior Lamps
Without Moonroof
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact location
of each button on the overhead console
depends upon your vehicle features.
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. When
the door function is off and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps stay off. The
indicator lamp lights amber when the door
function is off.
Note: Press the button again to switch the
door function back on. When the door
function is on and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps turn on. The
indicator lamp lights blue when the door A B C D A
E201211
function is on.
A Individual map lamps.
B All lamps on.
C Door function.
D All lamps off.
Note: You can switch individual map lamps
on independently by pressing a map lens.
59
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps 3rd Row Seats
2nd Row Seats

With Moonroof A
E204767
A Dome lamps.
E201099
Without Moonroof Glove Box Lamp

The glove box lamp turns on when you
open it.
A A Cargo Compartment Lamp

The cargo compartment lamp turns on
when you open the rear liftgate.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)

Adjust the ambient lighting using the
E201084 touchscreen.
The ambient lighting controls are in the
A Individual map lamps. SYNC Settings menu.
60
Lighting
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On

Touch a color once.
Changing the Color

Touch any color once to change the
lighting to that color.
Adjusting the Intensity

Drag the colors up or down to increase or
decrease the intensity.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off

Touch the active color once or drag the
active color all the way down to zero
intensity.
61
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS B
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. Failure to
personal injury.
When closing the power windows,
verify they are free of obstruction and A
make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
Note: If the vehicle is to be left

unsupervised, the vehicle key should be
taken to ensure that the windows are not
operated inadvertently.
Note: If you operate the switches often
during a short period of time, the system
E131466
might become inoperable for a certain time
to prevent damage due to overheating.
A Press the switch to open the
Note: If you operate both the switch on the window.
relevant door and the switch for that
window on the driver’s door at the same B Lift the switch to close the
time, the window stops moving. window.
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Driver’s Door Switches

You can operate all the windows with the
switches on the door trim panel of the
driver’s door.
62
Windows and Mirrors
Front and Rear Passengers’ Door Note: On vehicles without global opening
Switches and closing, the rear windows cannot be
operated from the driver side when the
safety switch is pressed.
B
A
E131468
E131467
A switch in the driver’s door disables the
rear passenger electric window switches.
A Press the switch to open the
The indicator in the safety switch turns on
window.
once you press the switch.
B Lift the switch to close the
window. Resetting the Memory of the
Electric Windows - Vehicle with
Opening and Closing the Driver One Touch Up/Down on Driver
Side Window Automatically Side only
Press or lift the switch to the second action WARNING

point and release it. Press or lift it again to Bounce-back is off until you reset the
stop the window. memory. Take care when closing the
windows to avoid personal injury or
Opening and Closing Other damage to your vehicle.
Windows Automatically
Note: You can open and close other In the event of a flat battery or after the
windows automatically only if your vehicle battery has been disconnected from your
is equipped with global opening and closing. vehicle, you must reset the memory for the
Press or lift the switch to the second action driver window.
point and release it. Press or lift it again to 1. Open the window.
stop the window. 2. Lift and hold the switch to second
action point until the window is fully
Safety Switch for the Rear
closed.
Windows
3. Lift the switch for more than two
Note: You can always operate the rear and seconds and release.
front passenger windows from the driver’s
4. Open the window using the first action
door if your vehicle is equipped with global
point and try to close it automatically
opening and closing.
using second action point.
63
Windows and Mirrors
5. If the window does not open or close Proceed as follows to override this
automatically when the switch is protection feature when there is a
pressed or lifted to second action resistance, for example in winter:
points, repeat the procedure. 1. Close the window twice until it reaches
Anti-trap windows the point of resistance and let it
reverse.
Anti-trap windows are designed to prevent 2. Close the window a third time to the
objects from getting caught between the point of resistance.
glass and the seal when the electric
window is closed. Upon sensing an Note: This operation should occur within
obstruction, the window automatically two seconds after the window reaches the
re-opens and allows the trapped object to reversing end position.
be removed. 3. The bounce-back feature disables and
you can close the window manually.
Safety Mode The window goes past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.
Note: The anti-trap function is not active
during this procedure. See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if the window does not close after
Note: When you close the window using
the third attempt.
auto-up for the third time with the obstacle
in the way, the anti-trap function disables. Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
Make sure there are no obstacles in the way
of the closing window. WARNING
If the system detects a malfunction, it Bounce-back is off until you reset the
enters a safety mode. The windows move memory. Take care when closing the
for only about 0.8 seconds at a time and windows to avoid personal injury or
then stop again. Close the windows by damage to your vehicle.
lifting the switch again when the windows
stop moving. Have your vehicle checked
If you have disconnected the battery, you
as soon as possible.
must reset the bounce-back memory
Bounce-Back separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
The window automatically stops and window is fully closed.
reverses some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing. 2. Release the switch.
3. Lift the switch again for one more
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature second.
WARNING 4. Press and hold the switch until the
window is fully open.
If you override bounce-back, the
window does not reverse if it detects 5. Release the switch.
an obstacle. Take care when closing 6. Lift and hold the switch until the
the windows to avoid personal injury or window is fully closed.
damage to your vehicle.
7. Open the window and then try to close
it automatically.
64
Windows and Mirrors
8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the EXTERIOR MIRRORS

window does not close automatically.
Power Exterior Mirrors
GLOBAL OPENING AND
WARNING
CLOSING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
You can use the remote control to operate vehicle is moving. This could result
the windows with the ignition off. in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows

You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows and
vent the moonroof. Release the button B
once movement starts. Press the lock or A C
unlock button to stop movement.
E131480
Closing the Windows

A Left-hand side.
WARNING
B Off.
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are C Right-hand side.
free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press

and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
65
Windows and Mirrors
E131481 E131482
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror. Press the button to fold the mirrors inward.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Release the button to stop and reverse the
direction of movement, or to fold the
Push the mirror toward the door window mirrors outward.
glass.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror
in its support when returning it to its The heated exterior mirrors will remove
original position. ice, mist and fog. See Heated Rear
Window (page 106).
Power-Folding Mirrors
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The power folding mirrors operate with the
ignition on. The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
Note: The mirrors no longer operate if you housing blinks when you switch on the
switch the ignition off. direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror

housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 173).
66
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR SUN VISORS

Manual Dimming Mirror
WARNING
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you

to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
E138666
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
WARNING window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
vehicle is moving. This could result Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of

bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light E162197
from reaching the sensor.
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the moonroof. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
67
Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS D Sunshade close: Press and

When closing the moonroof, verify release to close the sunshade.
that it is free of obstruction and
E Moonroof close: Press and
make sure that children and pets are
release to close the moonroof
not in the proximity of the roof opening.
from either the open or vent
positions.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch Bounce-Back
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, touch the control a The moonroof will stop automatically and
second time. reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold A within two seconds of
a bounce-back event to override this
function.
E191272
A Moonroof: Press and release to

open the moonroof. The
moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position. Press and
release the control again to open
the moonroof fully.
B Moonroof vent: Press and
release to vent the moonroof.
C Sunshade open: Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed. The sunshade stops
short of its fully opened position
for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the
sunshade fully, press the control
again.
68
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
M0 Cluster
E228150
A Tachometer. D Fuel gauge.

B Multi-function display. E Engine coolant temperature
gauge.
C Speedometer.
69
Instrument Cluster
M2 Cluster
E266346
A Multi-function display. Outside Air Temperature
B Speedometer. Shows the outside air temperature.

C Engine coolant temperature Compass
gauge and or fuel gauge.
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
Note: In the design and manufacture of
Trip Computer
instrumentation, Ford complies with the
government regulations that indicate the See General Information (page 77).
value of the speedometer is not less than
the actual speed. In normal operation, Vehicle Settings and Personalization
customers may observe by other
instruments (such as a GPS Unit) that the See General Information (page 77).
indicated speed is slightly faster than the Engine Coolant Temperature
actual vehicle speed. This is normal and
Gauge
does not represent an instrument
malfunction. WARNING
Information Display Do not remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the cooling system is hot.
Odometer Wait 10 minutes for the cooling
system to cool down. Cover the coolant
Registers the accumulated distance your
reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent
vehicle has traveled.
the possibility of scalding and slowly
remove the cap. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
70
Instrument Cluster
At normal operating temperature, the Note: Depending on your vehicle

needle remains in the center section. If the specification, some warning lamps and
needle enters the red section, the engine indicators may not be active.
is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the
ignition off and determine the cause once Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp (If
the engine has cooled down. Equipped)
Note: Do not restart the engine until the The speed control system
cause of overheating has been determined indicator light changes color to
and resolved. E144524
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 156).
Fuel Gauge
On (white light): Illuminates when the
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly adaptive cruise control system is turned
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope. on. Turns off when the speed control
The fuel gauge indicates about how much system is turned off.
fuel is in the fuel tank. Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump the adaptive cruise control system is
symbol indicates on which side of your engaged. Turns off when the speed control
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. system is disengaged.
Low Fuel Reminder Anti-Lock Braking System Warning

A warning tone sounds and a message Lamp
appears in the information display when If it illuminates when you are
the distance to empty reaches 80 km. driving, this indicates a
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at malfunction. You will continue
different fuel gauge positions depending on to have the normal braking system
fuel economy conditions. This variation is (without anti-lock braking system) unless
normal. the brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS Automatic High Beam Lamp (If
Equipped)
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition Illuminates when this feature is
that may become serious. Some lamps on. See Autolamps (page 55).
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the Auto Start-Stop Lamp (If Equipped)
respective system warning lamp for further
information. Illuminates to inform you when
the engine shuts down or in
Note: Some warning indicators appear in conjunction with a message.
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
71
Instrument Cluster
Battery Warning Lamp Direction Indicator

If it illuminates when driving, this Illuminates when the left or right
indicates a malfunction. Switch direction indicator or the hazard
off all unnecessary electrical warning flasher is turned on. If
equipment. Have your vehicle checked by the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
an authorized dealer immediately. for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a
Bulb (page 231).
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator (If
Equipped) Door Ajar Indicator
Illuminates when you switch this Illuminates when the ignition is
feature off or in conjunction with on and any door is not
E124823
a message. See Blind Spot completely closed.
Information System (page 173). See
Information Messages (page 85). Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
Brake System Warning Lamp Illuminates when the engine or
Illuminates when you engage the motor coolant temperature is
parking brake with the ignition high. Stop your vehicle as soon
on. as possible and contact your authorized
dealer.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this Engine Oil Warning Lamp
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
WARNING
system malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer If it illuminates when you are driving
immediately. do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your
WARNING vehicle checked.
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant If it illuminates with the engine
decrease in braking performance running or when you are driving,
may occur. It may take you longer to stop this indicates a malfunction.
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
soon as possible. Driving extended do so and switch the engine off. Check the
distances with the parking brake engaged engine oil level.
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
Electronic Locking Differential (If
Equipped)
Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
Illuminates when using the
Illuminates when you switch this electronic locking differential.
feature on. See Using Cruise E163170
E71340 Control (page 156).
72
Instrument Cluster
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp Glow Plug Indicator

Illuminates and a tone sounds With the key in the on position,
to remind you to fasten your it illuminates when the glow plug
E71880 seatbelt. See Seatbelt heat is necessary as a starting
Reminder (page 24). aid. Wait until the light goes off before
starting.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If After you start the engine, the light should
Equipped) turn off. When the engine is cold, the light
should always illuminate for a short period.
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged. High Beam Indicator
E181780
Illuminates when you switch the

Illuminates when four-wheel
high beam headlamps on. It
drive high is engaged.
E181779
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Front Airbag Warning Lamp
Hill Descent Control (If Equipped)
If the warning lamp does not
illuminate during start up, Illuminates when hill descent
E67017 remains on or flashes, the control is switched on.
system may be disabled. E163171
Have your vehicle checked by an Hood Ajar Warning Lamp

authorized dealer.
Illuminates when the ignition is
Front Fog Lamps Indicator (If Equipped) on and the hood is not
E159324
completely closed.
front fog lamps on. Lane Keeping Aid Indicator (If
Equipped)
Frost Warning Lamp (If Equipped) Illuminates when you activate

the lane keeping system.
WARNING E144813
Even if the temperature rises to

above 4°C there is no guarantee that Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp
the road is free of hazards caused by Illuminates when the liftgate is
inclement weather. not completely closed.
E162453
Illuminates when the outside air

temperature is 4°C or below.
73
Instrument Cluster
®
AdBlue Lamp Powertrain Fault
Illuminates and a message will Illuminates when a powertrain
appear in the information display or a four-wheel drive fault has
E211760
when the Diesel Exhaust Fluid been detected. Contact an
®
(AdBlue ) level is low and needs to be authorized dealer as soon as possible.
refilled, or a fault is active in the system.
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator (If Equipped)
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are E67040 rear fog lamps on.
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Fasten Rear Seat Belt Warning
Lamp
Low Tire Pressure Warning (If Equipped)
Illuminates and a tone sounds
Illuminates when your tire to signal the rear seatbelts are
pressure is low. If the lamp E206718
not buckled.
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible. Service Engine Soon
It also illuminates momentarily when you The service engine soon
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp indicator light illuminates when
is functional. If it does not illuminate when the ignition is first turned on prior
you switch the ignition on, or begins to to engine start to check the bulb. If the
flash at any time, have the system checked service engine soon indicator light stays
by an authorized dealer. illuminated after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
Low Washer Fluid of the vehicle emissions control system.
It illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low. If it flashes, engine misfire may be
E132353 occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
Over Speed Warning (If Equipped) converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
Illuminates if the vehicle exceeds acceleration and deceleration) and have
120km/h. your vehicle immediately serviced.
E165368
Shift Indicator (If Equipped)
Parking Lamps Indicator
Illuminates to inform you that
Illuminates when you switch the shifting to a higher gear as
parking lamps on. indicated may give better fuel
economy and lower CO2
emissions. It does not illuminate during
periods of high acceleration, braking or
when the clutch pedal is pressed.
74
Instrument Cluster
Speed Limiter (If Equipped) Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp

Illuminates when you switch on Illuminates when there is excess
the speed limiter system. See water in the fuel filter. Drain off
E172886 Speed Limiter (page 163). the water immediately. See
Fuel Quality (page 126).
Stability Control Warning Lamp (If
Equipped)
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
It flashes when the system is INDICATORS
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639 or does not illuminate when you Note: Depending on your vehicle options
switch the ignition on, this indicates a and instrument cluster type, not all of the
malfunction. During a malfunction the audible warnings and indicators will display
system will switch off. Have your vehicle or be available.
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability Key in Ignition
Control (page 143).
Sounds when the driver's door is open and
the key is in the ignition.
Stability Control Off Indicator (If
Equipped) Headlamps On
Illuminates when you switch the Sounds when you remove the key from the
system off. It will go out when ignition and open the driver's door and you
E130458 you switch the system back on have left the headlamps or parking lamps
or when you switch the ignition off. See on.
Using Stability Control (page 143).
Parking Brake On
Traffic Sign Recognition Road Sounds when the parking brake is on and
Condition Indicator (If Equipped) your vehicle is moving. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
Illuminates when the road the parking brake, have the system
condition is prohibiting traffic checked by an authorized dealer
E181349 sign recognition. immediately.
Traffic Sign Recognition Speed Door Ajar

Limit Indicator (If Equipped) Sounds when the driver's door is ajar, or
Illuminates when you have when any door is ajar while the vehicle is
exceeded the speed limit for traveling over 5 km/h.
E181348 traffic sign recognition.
Seatbelt Reminder
Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in
an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
75
Instrument Cluster
Lane Departure Warning (If Equipped)

Activates when the system detects
unintentional drifting toward the outside
of the lane and alerts or aids you to stay in
the lane through the steering system and
instrument cluster display.
Front and Rear Park Aid (If Equipped)

Sounds to alert driver of objects
approaching the front and rear of the
vehicle while moving forward or reversing.
76
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display

M0 Cluster
WARNING
You can control various systems on your

vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
E266430
The information display shows the
corresponding information.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
E204495 check in the box indicates the
feature is on, and unchecked indicates the
feature is off.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedometer
Distance to E
Trip odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
77
Note: Press and hold OK on the current

screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Instantaneous Fuel
Average Fuel
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
Note: You can reset your average fuel

economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Prog Range Sel
AdBlue® Stat.
Hill Start Assist
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor Hold OK to Reset
Trailer Sway
Exhaust Filter Check
Settings
Alarm Choose your applicable setting.
Ask on Exit
Chimes Park Slot
Information
Lighting Autolamp delay Choose your applicable setting.
Locks Autolock
Vehicle Autounlock
78
Settings
Mislock
Remote Unlock Choose your applicable setting.
Switches inhibit
Oil Life Hold OK to Reset Oil Life
Reset
Power Choose your applicable setting.
Liftgate
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Reverse Wiper
Display Distance Choose your applicable setting.
Temper- Choose your applicable setting.
ature
Language Choose your applicable setting.
79
Information Display Menu

M2 Cluster You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
E266427
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Tachometer
Tachometer + Temperature Gauge
Off Road
Power Distribution
Digital Speedometer
Tire Pressure
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
80
Trip 1 & 2
All values
All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Instant fuel
Fuel History
Average Speed
Auto Start Stop
• Instant Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
AdBlue® Status
Blindspot
Chimes Park Slot Found
Information
Cross Traffic Alert
Cruise Control Choose your applicable setting.
Driver Alert Driver Alert
Display
Exhaust Filter Status Hold OK to clean.
Hill Start Assist
81
Driver Assist
Lane Keeping Sys Mode Choose your applicable
setting.
Intensity Choose your applicable
setting.
Pre-Collision On
Alert Sensitivity Choose your applicable
setting.
Dist. Indication
Active Braking
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor Hold OK to Reset
Trailer Sway
Speed Limiter
Traffic Signs Display
Speed Warning
Settings
Alarm Choose your applicable setting.
Ask on Exit
Lighting Auto Highbeam
Autolamp Delay Choose your applicable setting.
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Mislock
Remote Unlock Choose your applicable setting.
Switch Inhibit
Vehicle Oil Life Reset Hold OK to Reset
Power Liftgate Choose your applicable setting.
82
Settings
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Reverse Wiper
MyKey MyKey "Num" MyKeys
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
Create MyKey
Do Not Disturb
Emergency Assist
Traction Control Choose your applicable setting.
Max Speed Choose your applicable setting.
Speed Minder Choose your applicable setting.
Volume Limiter
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
Display Distance Choose your applicable setting.
Setup
Temperature Choose your applicable setting.
Gauge Display Choose your applicable setting.
Language Choose your applicable setting.
CLOCK TRIP COMPUTER
For detailed instructions on how to adjust Distance to Empty

the clock Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
83
Instantaneous fuel consumption Measure units

Indicates the current average fuel To toggle between either metric or imperial
consumption. units, scroll to this display and press the
OK button.
Average Fuel Consumption
Toggling the units of measure using this
Indicates the average fuel consumption display will affect the following displays:
since the function was last reset. • Distance to empty.
Trip Odometer • Average fuel consumption.
• Instantaneous fuel consumption.
Records the distance travelled on
individual journeys. • Average speed.
Digital Speedometer Temperature units
The speed your vehicle is traveling at will To toggle between metric and imperial
display as a digital number. units, scroll to this display and press the
OK button.
Average Speed Toggling the temperature units using this
display will affect the following displays:
Indicates the average speed since the
function was last reset. • Outside air temperature.
• The temperature display in the
Outside Air Temperature automatic climate control.
Shows the outside air temperature.
Chime deactivation
Odometer The following chimes can be switched off:
Records the total distance traveled by your • Warning messages.
vehicle. • Information messages.
Resetting the trip computer MyKey
To reset a particular display: MyKey is a feature which allows customers
1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up to assign keys which will enable extra
and down arrow buttons and press the safety features designed for use by young
right arrow button. drivers. Features can be adjusted and
2. Highlight the function to be reset. customized to suit the level of driver.
Features include:
3. Hold the OK button pressed.
• Muted audio when seatbelts are
unbuckled.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS • Vehicle speed limited.
Languages • Speed minder.
• Volume limiter on audio system.
A selection of languages are available
using the menus in the setting menu. • Fuel warnings given at higher distance
to empty values.
84
• Prevention of turning off some driver

assist systems:
• Traction control
• Park aid
• Blind Spot monitor and cross traffic
alert
• Collision Warning System -
additionally uses maximum
sensitivity as default
• Emergency assist
• Do not disturb E201420
• Mileage logged by MyKeys. Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
INFORMATION MESSAGES information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
Note: Depending on your vehicle options, time.
not all of the messages display or are You need to confirm certain messages
available. Certain messages may be before you can access the menus.
abbreviated or shortened depending upon
which cluster type you have.
4WD
Message Action
4x4 Temporarily Displays if the 4x4 system temporarily disables to protect

Disabled itself from overheating.
4x4 OFF Displays if the 4x4 system automatically disables to protect
itself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact
spare tire installed or if the system is overheating.
4x4 Restored The 4x4 system resumes normal function and clears this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system cools.
Check 4x4 Displays in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
sion/4x4 light if the 4x4 system is not operating properly. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact a
certified technician as soon as possible.
For 4x4 LOW Slow to 5 Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and your
km/h vehicle's speed is greater than 5 km/h.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and your
5 km/h vehicle's speed is greater than 5 km/h.
85
Message Action
For 4x4 LOW Apply Displays when 4x4 LOW cannot be engaged due to inad-
Brake equate brake application. Apply brake to engage 4x4 LOW.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Apply Display when 4x4 LOW cannot be disengaged due to inad-
Brake equate brake application. Apply brake to disengage 4x4 LOW.
For 4x4 LOW Apply Displays when 4x4 LOW cannot be engaged due to inad-
Clutch equate clutch application. Apply clutch to engage 4x4 LOW.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Apply Displays when 4x4 LOW cannot be engaged due to inad-
Clutch equate clutch application. Apply clutch to disengage 4x4
LOW.
For 4x4 LOW Shift to N Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and you
do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and you
N do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).
4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift.
Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
157).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
Available cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 157).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
Available Sensor visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of
Blocked See Manual radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 157).
86
Message Action
Front Sensor Not Aligned Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
Resume Control to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting
Down the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission
into a lower gear.
®
AdBlue Level
Message Action
AdBlue® Low Range: Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
XXXX km/mi Refill Soon ®
diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue ) tank will be empty. Refill the
®
diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue ) tank as soon as possible.
AdBlue® Low No engine Indicates the approximate distance remaining before the
start in XXXX km/mi ®
diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue ) tank will be empty and when
it will restrict the engine from starting. Refill the diesel exhaust
®
fluid (AdBlue ) tank as soon as possible.
AdBlue® level empty. The diesel exhaust fluid tank (AdBlue ) is empty and is
®
Refill to start engine restricting the engine from starting. Refill the diesel exhaust
®
fluid (AdBlue ) tank to re-start engine.
®
AdBlue System Malfunction
Message Action
AdBlue® sys Fault The system has detected a fault that requires service.
Service req'd
AdBlue® sys No engine The system has detected a fault that requires service.
start in XXXX km
AdBlue® sys Service The system has detected a fault that requires service.
req'd to start engine
87
Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 46).
Auto Start Stop (If Equipped)
Message Action
Auto StartStop Manual Displayed when Auto-Start-Stop system is not functioning

Restart Required and requires the user to manually restart.
Auto StartStop Press Displayed when the clutch needs to be pressed to restart the
Clutch to Start Engine engine.
Auto StartStop Press a Displayed when a pedal needs to be pressed to restart the
Pedal to Start Engine engine. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 124).
Auto StartStop Select Displayed when neutral needs to be selected to restart engine.
Neutral To Start Engine See Auto-Start-Stop (page 124).
Auto StartStop Malfunc- The system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on
tion Service Required or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See
Auto-Start-Stop (page 124).
Auto StartStop Press The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder
Brake Harder to Activate to start.
Auto StartStop Not Displays when conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop
Available system to function properly. See Auto-Start-Stop (page
124).
Auto StartStop Shift to Select park for the system to restart the engine.
P, then Restart Engine
88
Message Action
Auto StartStop Press The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to
Brake to Start Engine start.
Auto StartStop Deactiv- Displays the system status
ated by Switch
Auto StartStop Activ- Displays the system status
ated by Switch
AWD (If Equipped)
Message Action
AWD Temporarily Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily
Disabled disabled to protect itself from overheating.
AWD OFF Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
AWD Restored The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/AWD light when the AWD system is not operating prop-
erly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
89
Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Low Battery Features Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Temporarily Turned Off extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Turn Power Off To Save Displayed when the battery management system determines
Battery that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-
trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Action
Blindspot System Fault Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot Not Available Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact your
Sensor Blocked See authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind Spot
Manual Information System (page 173).
Cross Traffic Alert Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 173).
Cross Traffic Not Avail- Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross
able Sensor Blocked See traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot
Manual Information System (page 173).
Cross Traffic System Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
Fault your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
90
Doors and Locks
Message Action
Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely
closed.
Hood Ajar Displays when the hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited Displays when the door switches have been disabled.
Security Mode
Child Lock Malfunction Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child
Service Required locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon.
Suggested
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
Available authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 139).
91
Hill Descent Control
Message Action
For Hill Descent Reduce Displayed when vehicle speed is too high for HDC to engage.
Speed 20MPH or Less Reduce speed to below that indicated in the message to
engage HDC.
For Hill Descent Reduce
Speed 32 Km/h or Less
Hill Descent Control Off Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to excessive
System Cooling heat. Allow system to cool before re-engaging.
Hill Descent Control Displayed when there is a fault with the HDC system. See your
Fault authorized dealer.
For Hill Descent Select Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to vehicle not
Gear being in gear. Select gear to engage HDC.
Keys and Keyless Entry
Message Action
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
To START Press Brake Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
To START Press Clutch Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting
the vehicle.
Key Program Successful Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Failure Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
Learned number of keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
Learned keys have been programmed.
92
Message Action
Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
Soon soon as possible.
Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
Integrated Key using two existing keys.
Engine ON Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle
and the engine is on.
Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
Malfunction Service dealer as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
ility Clean Screen shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
tion Service Required dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
Wheel hand s on the steering wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on with your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 226).
93
Message Action
Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop the
Temperature vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 225).
Power Reduced to Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help
Lower Engine Temp reduce high coolant temperatures.
Transport Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
your authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Factory mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Park Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Front
Parking Aid (page 147).
Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 146).
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Park Brake
Message Action
Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 5 km/h. If the warning
stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
94
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Lock Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle
Safely in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Powertrain
Message Action
Check Locking Differen- Displayed when there is a malfunction with the electronic
tial locking differential that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Fuel Pressure Low Displayed when there is a loss in fuel system pressure. See
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
To START Press Brake Displays as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
Engine Start Pending Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
95
Terrain Management System
Message Action
Terrain Management Displayed when there is a fault with the Terrain Management
System Fault system. See your authorized dealer.
Mode Change Not Displayed when the Terrain Management system was unable
Accepted, Retry to complete a mode change. Retry to enter terrain modes.
To Enter Rock Mode 4x4 Displayed when Terrain Management system is unable to
LOW is Required enter crawl mode as the vehicle is not in 4X4 Low. Engage
4X4 Low to enter crawl mode.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Exit Displayed when 4X4 Low cannot be disengaged as the Terrain
Rock Mode Management is in crawl mode. Exit crawl mode to disengage
4X4 Low.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 247).
Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 247).
Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
Fault your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 247). If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
96
Transmission
Message Action
Transmission Malfunc- See your authorized dealer.

tion Service Now
Transmission Over- The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
heating Stop Safely safe place as soon as it is possible.
Transmission Service See your authorized dealer.
Required
Transmission Limited Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
Function See Manual limited functionality.
Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal Displays as a reminder to press the brake pedal in order to
select a gear.
97
Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL Note: Depending on your vehicle option

package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
C D E F
B H
A I
M L K J
E200604
A Recirculated air. L Rear passenger power.

B A/C. M Rear fan speed control.
C Fan speed control.
Recirculated Air
D Power.
Press to switch between outside air and
E Air distribution control. recirculated air. The air currently in the
F Temperature control. passenger compartment recirculates. This
may reduce the time needed to cool the
G Max defrost. interior, when used with A/C, and reduce
H Max A/C. unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
I Heated rear window.
J Rear passenger temperature
control.
K Rear control lock.
98
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or Max Defrost

prevent you from switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk Turn to switch on defrost. Air flows through
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on the windshield vents and the fan adjusts
and off in various air distribution control to the highest speed. You can also use this
combinations during hot weather to improve setting to defog and clear the windshield
cooling efficiency. of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear
window also turns on when you select
A/C maximum defrost.
Press to switch the air conditioning on or Note: To prevent window fogging, you
off. Use A/C with recirculated air to cannot select recirculated air when
improve cooling performance and maximum defrost is on.
efficiency.
Max A/C
Note: In certain conditions, for example,
maximum defrost, the air conditioning Turn to the left for maximum cooling.
compressor may continue to operate even Recirculated air flows through the
though you switch off the air conditioning. instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest
Fan Speed Control speed.
Adjust the volume of air circulated in the Heated Rear Window (If Equipped)
vehicle.
Press to switch the heated rear window on
Power and off. See Heated Rear Window (page
106).
Press to switch the system on and off.
When the system is off, it prevents outside Rear Passenger Temperature
air from entering the vehicle. Control (If Equipped)
Air Distribution Control Adjust the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment.
Press to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell Rear Control Lock (If Equipped)
vents on or off. You can distribute air
through any combination of these vents Press to lock out the rear passenger
climate controls. When illuminated, you
Temperature Control can only operate the rear passenger
Adjusts the temperature of the air settings through the front controls.
circulated in your vehicle. Rear Passenger Power (If Equipped)
Press to switch the rear system on and off.
Rear Fan Speed Control (If Equipped)

Adjust the volume of air circulated to the
rear passenger compartment.
99
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
A B C
L D
K E
F J I H G F
E200620
Left-hand Temperature Control

A Left-hand temperature control.
B Fan speed control. Adjusts the temperature setting on the
left-hand side.
C Right-hand temperature control.
D Max A/C or heated windshield. Fan Speed Control
E Recirculated air. Adjust the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
F Heated seats.
G A/C. Right-hand Temperature Control
H Power. Adjusts the temperature setting on the
I Auto. right-hand side. This control also adjusts
the left-hand side temperature when you
J Heated rear window. switch off dual zone mode.
K Defrost.
L Max defrost.
100
Climate Control
Max A/C (If Equipped) Power

Press for maximum cooling. The right-hand Press to switch the system on and off.
and left-hand settings set to LO, When the system is off, it prevents outside
recirculated air flows through the air from entering the vehicle.
instrument panel vents, air conditioning
turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest Auto
speed. Press to switch on automatic operation,
Heated Windshield (If Equipped) then adjust the temperature control to
select the desired temperature. The
Press the button to clear the windshield of system adjusts fan speed, air distribution,
thin ice and fog. The heated windshield air conditioning operation, and outside or
turns off after a short period of time. recirculated air adjust to heat or cool the
vehicle to maintain the desired
Note: Make sure that the engine is running temperature. You can also switch off dual
before switching the heated windshield on. zone mode by pressing and holding the
Note: The system does not operate if the button for more than two seconds.
battery charge level is low.
Heated Rear Window
Recirculated Air
Press to switch the heated rear window on
Press to switch between outside air and and off. See Heated Rear Window (page
recirculated air. The air currently in the 106).
passenger compartment recirculates. This
may reduce the time needed to cool the Defrost
interior (when used with A/C) and reduce Press to distribute air through the
unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. windshield air vents and de-mister. Air
distribution to the instrument panel and
Heated Seats
footwell vents turns off. You can also use
Press to cycle through the various heat this setting to defog and clear the
settings and on and off. See Heated windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Seats (page 116).
Max Defrost
A/C
Press to switch on defrost. The left-hand
Press to switch the air conditioning on or and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows
off. Use A/C with recirculated air to through the windshield vents, and the fan
improve cooling performance and adjusts to the highest speed. You can also
efficiency. use this setting to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice. The
Note: In certain conditions (for example, heated rear window also turns on when
maximum defrost), the air conditioning you select maximum defrost.
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning. Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
101
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE Manual Climate Control

INTERIOR CLIMATE Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
General Hints distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. Automatic Climate Control
Note: You may feel a small amount of air Note: Adjusting the settings when your
from the footwell air vents regardless of the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
air distribution setting. not necessary. The system automatically
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
your vehicle, do not drive with the system selected temperature as quickly as possible.
switched off or with recirculated air always For the system to function efficiently, the
switched on. instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow Note: If you select AUTO during cold
to the rear seats. temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
the air intake area at the base of the until the engine warms up.
windshield.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
Note: To improve the time to reach a temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
comfortable temperature in hot weather, is hot, the system automatically uses
drive with the windows open until you feel recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
cold air through the air vents. Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control Automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest Press AUTO.

setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
102
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
point, then adjust the setting as neces-
sary.
3 Direct air to the footwell using the air
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C.

2 Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press AUTO.

setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
103
Climate Control
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
2 Press A/C. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS (If Equipped)
104
Climate Control
Vehicles with Aux A/C Only
E250140
A Rear control lock indicator. Rear Fan Speed Control

B Rear fan speed control. Adjusts the volume of air circulated to the
Rear Control Lock Indicator
When illuminated, you can only operate
the rear passenger settings through the
front controls.
105
Climate Control
Vehicles with Aux Heater and A/C
E200665
A Rear air distribution control. HEATED REAR WINDOW (If

B Rear fan speed control. Equipped)
C Rear passenger temperature
control. Press the button to clear the rear
D Rear control lock indicator. window of thin ice and fog. The
E184884
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Rear Air Distribution Control
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
Press to switch the direction of air flow. operating the heated windows.
Rear Fan Speed Control Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
Adjusts the volume of air circulated to the from the inside of the heated rear window.
rear passenger compartment. The vehicle Warranty may not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
Rear Passenger Temperature grid lines.
Control
Adjusts the temperature setting for the HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
When you switch the heated rear window
Rear Control Lock Indicator on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
When illuminated, you can only operate Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
the rear passenger settings through the with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
front controls. when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
106
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle and odor
concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see a qualified
technician.
107
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or • Do not recline the seatback more than
with the seatback reclined too far 30 degrees.
can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the
and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your
sensing system, resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible.
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain
upright against your seat back, with your comfortable.
feet on the floor. • Keep sufficient distance between
Do not recline the seatback as this yourself and the steering wheel. We
can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 25 cm
under the safety belt, resulting in between your breastbone and the
serious injury in the event of a crash. airbag cover.
Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
seatback to reduce the risk of serious slightly bent.
injury in the event of a crash or during • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
heavy braking. press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
E68595
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
When you use them properly, the seat, the head restraint when your vehicle is
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will moving.
provide optimum protection in the event Raise the rear head restraints when
of a crash. passengers occupy the rear seats.
When using a forward facing child
restraint on a rear seat, always
remove the head restraint from that
seat.
108
Seats
WARNINGS Third-Row Head Restraints (If

Do not remove the head restraint Equipped)
from an occupied seat.
Front Seat Head Restraints
E210120
The head restraints consist of:
E210118
A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
Second-Row Head Restraints B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
D Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
Adjusting the Head Restraint

Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head.
Raising the Head Restraint

E210119
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint

1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
109
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint Adjusting the Height of the Driver

Seat
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving.
Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward
E201043
Recline Adjustment
E201041
WARNING
Make sure the seat fully locks into
place by rocking it backward and E201044
forward.
110
Seats
WARNING POWER SEATS (If Equipped)

Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before WARNINGS
returning it to the original position. Do not adjust the driver's seat or
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that seatback when your vehicle is
it has fully latched after returning the seat moving. Adjusting your seatback
backrest to its original position. An while your vehicle is in motion may cause
unlatched seat may become dangerous if loss of control of your vehicle.
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
Adjusting the Lumbar Support of it to the original position.
the Driver Seat
E201042
111
Seats
E206206
WARNINGS
REAR SEATS (If Equipped) Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
Adjusting the Rear Seats seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
Second Row Seats
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
112
Seats
Recline Adjustment Note: Fully lower the head restraints when

folding the seats. See Head Restraints
(page 108).
Moving the Seats Backward and

Forward
E201038
Folding the Seat Backrest
WARNING
E201070
When folding or unfolding the seats,
take care not to get your fingers
Accessing the Third Row Seats
caught between the seat backrest
and seat frame. Failure to follow this WARNING
warning could result in serious personal
injury. Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat backrest before
returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
Note: Remove items from the second-row

seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before folding
the seats to the easy entry position.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seat backrest.
E206205
Note: You may have to move the front-row
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to seat forward to allow the second-row seat
fold the seat backrest forward. to be fully folded.
113
Seats
Note: You may have to lower the center

head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
108).
Fold the second-row seat to access the
third row:
1. Fold the outermost head restraint. See
Head Restraints (page 108).
E190846
5. Pull the head restraint back up to its

normal upright position.
Folding and Unfolding the Third Row

Manual Seat (If Equipped)
1. Remove all objects from the seat.
2. Fold the outboard head restraint. See
Head Restraints (page 108).
E206205
2. Pull the handle on the top of the seat

to move the seats to the easy entry
position to access the third row. 2
3. Move the left-side seat forward until it
releases from the catch.
4. To return the seat backrest to the
1
upright position, lift it toward the rear
of the vehicle and rotate it until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
E201039
3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold the

seat backrest by pulling and holding
the handle while pushing the seat
backrest forward. Release the handle
once the seat backrest starts rotating
forward.
114
Seats
4. To return the seatback to the upright

position, pull the long strap on the seat
backrest. A
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
E206212
E190924 A Press to fold and unfold the

left-hand side seat.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it. B Press to fold and unfold the
right-hand side seat.
PowerFold™ Third Row Seats (If Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
Equipped) detection that allows the seat to stop and
The third row power seat buttons are reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
behind the third row seats on the left-hand you can remove the obstacle.
quarter trim panel. Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
115
Seats
Note: In the unlikely event that the third Do not do the following:
row power seat stops prematurely or travels • Place heavy objects on the seat.
to an unexpected position, press the fold
button to reset the seat and return it to a • Operate the heated seat if water or any
normal position. other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
These seats feature a power one-touch
• Operate the heated seats unless the
operation that allows you to fold and stow
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the seats.
the battery to lose charge.
• The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
liftgate is open.
• If the ignition is off and the feature is
still running, the battery saver turns it
off after 10 minutes. Press unlock on
the remote entry key transmitter to
reactivate the power seats. See
Remote Control (page 29). E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped) through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
WARNING settings.
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
116
12 Volt DC Power Point Location

WARNING Power points may be in the following
locations:
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect • On the instrument panel.
use of the power points can cause • On the rear of the center console.
damage not covered by the vehicle • Inside the luggage compartment.
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury. 230 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you WARNING

can use the socket to power 12 volt Do not keep electrical devices
appliances with a maximum current rating plugged in the power point whenever
of 15 amps. the device is not in use. Do not use
If the power supply does not work after you any extension cord with the 230 volt AC
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition power point, since it will defeat the safety
on. protection design. Doing so may cause the
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the power point to overload due to powering
accessory plug. multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
Note: Do not use the power point over the fire or serious injury.
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: The power point turns off when you
Note: Always keep the power point caps switch the ignition off.
closed when not in use.
You can use the power point for electric
Do not insert objects other than an devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
accessory plug into the power point. This on the rear of the center console.
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods. E206133
117
When the indicator light on the power point

is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
118
Storage Compartments
GLOVE BOX
The glove box is on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Open the glove box using the latch handle.
E266391
Available console features include:

A Audio input and or USB port.
B Cup holders
C Cool box (if equipped).
D Coin storage.
E223956 E Auxiliary power point (if
equipped).
Glove Box with Lock (If Equipped) F A/C power point (if equipped).
Lock the glove box using the ignition key.
To lock, close the glove box and insert the OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)
ignition key into the glove box lock and
rotate it clockwise. Remove the key.
To unlock the glove box, insert the ignition
key into the glove box lock and rotate it
counter clockwise.
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to

open it.
119
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
E247596
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
Note: Make sure the key is clean before
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
inserting it into any lock cylinder.
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell Note: Do not leave the key in the ignition
exhaust fumes. for an extended period of time when the
engine is not running. This is to prevent the
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle vehicle battery from losing charge.
may exhibit some unusual driving Switching the Ignition Off
characteristics for approximately 8 km
after you reconnect it. This is because the Turn the key to position 0.
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard Switching the Ignition to
any unusual driving characteristics during Accessory Mode
this period.
Turn the key to position I. Electrical
The powertrain control system meets all accessories, for example the radio, operate
Canadian interference-causing equipment without the engine running.
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise. Switching the Ignition On
When you start the engine, avoid pressing Turn the key to position II. All electrical
the accelerator pedal before and during circuits and accessories are operational
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal and the warning lamps and indicators
when you have difficulty starting the illuminate.
engine.
120
Starting the Engine • Without applying the clutch pedal

(manual transmission) or brake pedal
Turn the key to position III. Release the (automatic transmission), press and
key when the engine starts. release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
KEYLESS STARTING not start when the vehicle starts.
• Press the clutch pedal (manual
Note: The keyless starting system may not
transmission) or brake pedal
function if the key is close to metal objects
(automatic transmission), and then
or electronic devices such as cellular
press the button for any length of time.
phones.
An indicator light on the button
Note: A valid key must be located inside illuminates when then ignition is on and
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and when the engine starts.
start the engine.
Ignition Modes STEERING WHEEL LOCK -

VEHICLES WITHOUT: PUSH
BUTTON START
WARNING
Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before
attempting to move your vehicle.
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
lock could result in a crash.
To lock the steering wheel:

E144447
The keyless starting system has three

modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the clutch pedal
(manual transmission) or brake pedal
(automatic transmission), press and
release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
121
Your vehicle has an electronically

controlled steering wheel lock that
automatically operates.
The steering wheel will lock shortly after
you have parked your vehicle and the
passive key is outside it or when you lock
your vehicle.
Note: The steering wheel will not lock when
the ignition is on or when your vehicle is
moving.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
E247596
1. Remove the key from the ignition.

2. Rotate the steering wheel 180° from
the straight ahead position to engage
the lock.
To unlock the steering wheel: E144447
1. Insert the key in the ignition. The steering wheel unlocks when the
2. Turn the key to the on position. system detects a valid passive key inside
Note: You may need to rotate the steering your vehicle. If the steering wheel relocks,
wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is switch the ignition on to unlock it.
a steering wheel load applied. Note: You may have to slightly rotate the
steering wheel to assist unlocking it.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
BUTTON START Cold or Hot Engine
WARNING Switch the ignition on and wait
until the glow plug indicator goes
Always check that the steering wheel
off. Fully depress the clutch
lock is deactivated before
pedal (manual transmission) or brake
attempting to move your vehicle.
pedal (automatic transmission). Start the
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
engine.
lock could result in a crash.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
122
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal (manual Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
transmission) or brake pedal (automatic the engine has reached idle speed and then
transmission) while the engine is starting switch it off.
will stop the engine cranking and return to
ignition on.
Note: When the temperature is below
-15°C, you may need to crank the engine for
up to 10 seconds.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time.
Note: After a limited number of attempts
to start your engine, the system does not
allow you to try again until a period of time
has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, fully depress the brake
pedal. For vehicles with manual
transmission, fully depress the clutch
pedal and apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral.
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully
depressed and press the push button
ignition switch until the engine starts.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING
Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.
123
Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP - Under certain conditions the engine may

restart by itself, for example:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• You switch the heated windshield on.
WARNING • You switch the maximum defrost on.
Always switch the ignition off and • You turn the steering wheel.
fully apply the parking brake before • Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
carrying out any maintenance or neutral.
leaving your vehicle. Failure to follow this • To maintain adequate brake
instruction could result in personal injury assistance.
or death if the engine restarts.
• To maintain the interior climate or
reduce fogging.
Principle of Operation
Note: The blower motor speed could
The system is designed to help reduce fuel change during an automatic restart.
consumption and CO2 emissions by turning
Note: The system may not function if you
off the engine when idling, for example at leave electrical devices connected with the
traffic lights. ignition off, because they could drain the
Your vehicle has an enhanced starter battery.
motor that is designed for an increased
number of engine start events. Using Auto-Start-Stop
Under certain conditions the engine may WARNING
not stop, for example:
Apply the parking brake and shift into
• You have opened the driver door. park (P) before leaving your vehicle.
• You have unfastened the driver
seatbelt.
Stopping the Engine
• Your vehicle is at high altitude.
1. Release the accelerator pedal.
• You have switched the heated
windshield on. 2. Stop your vehicle in drive (D).
• You have switched tow/haul or manual 3. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
mode on. Note: The engine stops if the gearshift is in
• You have selected sport mode. park (P) or neutral (N) regardless of brake
• You have selected 4L or 4H. pedal position.
• Your vehicle is on a steep grade. Note: Power assist steering turns off when
the engine is off.
• The engine is warming up.
• The outside temperature is too low or Restarting the Engine
too high.
To restart the engine, do any of the
• The battery charge is low or battery following:
temperature is optimal operating
range. • Release the brake pedal.
• To maintain the interior climate or • Press the accelerator pedal.
reduce fogging. • Shift into drive (D), reverse (R), neutral
(N), or manual (M).
124
Unique Driving Characteristics

The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on.
To switch the system off, press
the switch and the word OFF
illuminates. Press again to
switch the system back on.
The auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green when the engine stops. It flashes
amber and a message appears when you
need to take an action.
The auto-start stop indicator
illuminates grey with a strike out
E146361
when the system is not available.
Note: The system turns off when it detects
a malfunction. If it remains inactive after an
ignition cycle, have your vehicle checked by
Replacing the Battery

Replace the battery with one of exactly
the same specification for the system to
function correctly.
125
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
WARNINGS
excessive or prolonged breathing of
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
pressure in an overfilled tank may permanent injury.
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
The fuel system may be under remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound with water for 15 minutes and seek
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel medical attention. Failure to seek
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may proper medical attention could lead to
spray out, which could cause serious permanent injury.
personal injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
Fuels can cause serious injury or through the skin. If you splash fuel on
death if misused or mishandled. your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
Fuel may contain benzene, which is thoroughly wash your skin with soap
a cancer-causing agent. and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
When refueling always shut the contact causes skin irritation.
engine off and never allow sparks or • Be particularly careful if you are taking
open flames near the fuel tank filler Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone for the treatment of alcoholism.
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid adverse reaction, serious personal
inhaling excess fumes. injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
Follow these guidelines when refueling: reactions.
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your FUEL QUALITY
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before WARNING
refueling. Do not mix diesel with gasoline,
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or gasohol or alcohol. This could cause
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic an explosion.
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed Use diesel that meets the specification
immediately call a physician, even if no defined by EN 590 or the relevant national
symptoms are immediately apparent. specification, from a trusted fuel supplier.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours. Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
Note: The use of aftermarket fuel additives
or other engine treatments are not
recommended.
126
Fuel and Refueling
Biodiesel Usage • You may need to cycle the ignition from

off to on several times after refueling
Your vehicle is suitable for use with to allow the fuel system to pump the
biodiesel blends up to 7% (B7). You can fuel from the tank to the engine. On
achieve acceptable engine performance restarting, cranking time will take a few
and durability using B7 by adhering to seconds longer than normal. Crank
below guidelines. Do not fill the fuel tank time will be longer than usual.
with fuel that contains biodiesel with
blends greater than 7%. • Normally, adding 5 L of fuel is enough
to restart the engine. If the vehicle is
Note: Do not use raw oils, fats or waste out of fuel and on a steep grade, more
cooking greases, these are not biodiesel. than 5 L may be required.
Note: If your vehicle experiences low
temperature fuel waxing issues, consider
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature
using different diesel brands or diesel with Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel run dry
lower biodiesel content. protection system to prevent engine
Note: We do not recommend the use of damage.
additional additives to prevent fuel waxing. The vehicle will enter an engine misfire
mode and shutdown at a pre-determined
Long-Term Storage distance after the Distance to Empty
Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. Do not becomes zero.
leave vehicles filled with biodiesel parked Refill the fuel tank with a minimum of 5 L
for more than one month. Diesel fuels diesel before resetting the feature.
containing biodiesel can degrade quickly
when stored for long periods of time, Reset the fuel run dry protection feature
especially when exposed to warm and by following the below steps:
humid conditions. We recommend that 1. Insert the ignition key and turn to
you seek advice from an authorized dealer. position II (Ignition).
2. Hold the key in the position for 20
Winter Driving seconds and turn back to 0 (Off).
Diesel can be adjusted seasonally for cold 3. Repeat the steps three times to
temperatures. For best results at complete the reset procedure.
temperatures below 2°C it is
recommended to use a diesel fuel that has Filling a Portable Fuel Container
been seasonally adjusted for the local
conditions. Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL • Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
Avoid running out of fuel. This may have container on the ground when filling.
an adverse effect on powertrain
components. • Do not fill a fuel container while it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
If you have run out of fuel: area).
127
Fuel and Refueling
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact

with the fuel container while filling. A B
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
REFUELING
WARNINGS C D
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when E206911
refueling.
When refueling always shut the A Type 1: Left hand side - press the
engine off and never allow sparks or fuel tank filler door to open it.
open flames near the fuel tank filler B Type 1: Right hand side - press
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone the fuel tank filler door to open
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely it.
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes. C Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to D Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
allow any residual fuel to drain into fuel tank filler door to open it.
the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
Stop refueling when the fuel pump it engages.
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
128
Fuel and Refueling
A B
E206912
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within

the area shown.
E139202
2. Unlock the fuel filler cap and remove E119081

it.
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the 6. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it then slowly remove it.
resting on the cover of the fuel tank 7. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
filler pipe opening. close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
A if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
B
E139203
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower

position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
129
Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (If

Equipped)
General Information
Do not rest your hand on the gearshift lever
or use the geashift lever to hang and
support objects. This could cause damage
to the transmission not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
or use the clutch pedal to keep your vehicle
stationary when waiting on a hill. This E99067
could cause damage to the clutch not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. 3. Raise the collar and shift into reverse
gear.
Failure to fully press the clutch pedal could
cause increased shift efforts, prematurely
wear transmission components or damage AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
to the transmission.
(If Equipped)
If any gear is not fully engaged, fully press
the clutch pedal and shift into neutral.
WARNINGS
Release the clutch pedal for a moment,
fully press the clutch pedal again and shift Always fully apply the parking brake
into gear. and make sure you shift into park (P).
Failure to follow this instruction
Shifting Into Reverse Gear could result in personal injury or death.
Do not shift into reverse gear when your Do not apply the brake pedal and
vehicle is moving. This could cause accelerator pedal simultaneously.
damage to the transmission not covered Applying both pedals simultaneously
by the vehicle Warranty. for more than a few seconds will limit
engine performance, which may result in
1. Fully press the brake pedal. difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and
2. Fully press the clutch pedal and shift could lead to serious injury.
into neutral.
Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.
This increases the tendency for your vehicle
to creep when you have selected a drive
gear.
130
Transmission
Transmission Selector Lever 10 Speed Transmission

Positions - 6 Speed
E269654
P Park.
R Reverse.
N Neutral.
D Drive.
E270856 S Sport mode and manual shifting
- 10 speed transmission.
P Park. Press the button (1) on the transmission
R Reverse. selector lever (2) to select reverse (R) or
drive (D). After the transmission is in drive
N Neutral. (D), you can then press the button (1) on
D Drive. the transmission selector lever (2) again
to select sport (S). When you operate the
S Sport mode and manual shifting +/- button in Sport mode, the current gear
- using the +/- positions. displays on the instrument panel.
Park (P)
WARNING
Move the transmission selector lever
to park (P) only when your vehicle is
stationary.
Note: To move the transmission selector

lever from park (P), apply the brake with
ignition key in position II.
Note: An audible warning sounds if you
open the driver door and you have not
moved the transmission selector lever to
park (P). The battery saver deactivates the
audible warning after a period of time.
131
Transmission
In this position, power is not transmitted Sport Mode (S)

to the driven wheels and the transmission
is locked. You can start the engine with the Switch on sport mode by shifting the
transmission selector lever in this position. transmission selector lever to sport (S). In
sport mode the transmission selects the
Reverse (R) optimum gear for best performance. This
gear selection is typically lower than that
WARNING of drive (D) and the shifts are faster.
Move the transmission selector lever SelectShift™ Automatic
to reverse (R) only when your vehicle Transmission
is stationary and the engine is at idle
speed. This feature gives you the ability to change
gears up or down as desired.
Shift the selector lever to reverse (R) to As long as the engine speed does not
allow your vehicle to move backward. exceed the maximum allowable limit,
downshifts are allowed. SelectShift
Neutral (N) automatically downshifts at low engine
WARNING speeds in order to prevent engine stalls.
In neutral (N) your vehicle has the Note: Engine damage may occur if you
ability to roll freely. If you intend to maintain excessive engine revving without
leave your vehicle, make sure you shifting.
apply the parking brake. SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
In this position, power is not transmitted limit.
to the driven wheels but the transmission For 6 speed transmissions - with the
is not locked. You can start the engine with transmission selector lever in the sport (S)
the transmission selector lever in this position:
position. • Move the lever forward (-) to
Drive (D) downshift.
• Move the lever backward (+) to upshift.
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy and smoothness.
Shift the transmission selector lever to
drive (D) to allow your vehicle to move
forward and shift automatically through
the forward gears.
The transmission shifts to the appropriate
gear for optimum performance based on
ambient temperature, road gradient,
vehicle load and your input.
132
Transmission
When your vehicle is stationary, only the

1st and 2nd gears can be selected. Manual
shifting is sequential, therefore gears
cannot be skipped.
Progressive Range Selection - 10

P Speed only
R Progressive Range Selection gives you the

ability to lockout gears from the automatic
N shifting range. This may provide you with
- an improved driving experience, for
example, in slippery conditions or when
D S experiencing a steep slope.
+
With the transmission in drive (D), press
the - button to activate PRS. The available
and selected gears appear on the
instrument cluster.
E136209
All available gears display with the current
gear indicated. Press the – button again to
For 10 speed transmissions - with the lock out gears beginning with the highest
transmission selector lever in sport (S) gear. For example, press the – button twice
position: to lock out 10th and 9th gears. Only the
• Press the (+) button on the available gears display and the
transmission selector lever to upshift. transmission shifts between the available
• Press the (-) button on the gears. Press the + button to unlock gears
transmission selector lever to to allow the transmission to shift to higher
downshift. gears. The transmission shifts within the
gear range you select.
Emergency Park Position Release

Lever
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
E269656
If the parking brake is fully released,
To exit SelectShift mode, return the but the brake warning lamp remains
transmission selector lever to drive (D). illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
133
Transmission
Note: For some markets this feature is 1. Lift up the cover in the center console
disabled. next to the transmission selector lever
with a screwdriver.
Your vehicle has a brake-shift interlock
feature that prevents moving the 2. Push down the locking button in the
transmission selector lever from park (P) slot and simultaneously move the
when the ignition is on and you do not transmission selector lever out of the
press the brake pedal. park (P) position and into another gear.
The system requires service if you cannot 10 Speed Transmission
move the gearshift lever out of park (P)
with the ignition on and the brake pedal Apply the parking brake and turn the
pressed. It is possible that a fuse has blown ignition off before performing this
or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not procedure.
operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 203).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are properly working, the following
procedure allows you to move the
transmission selector lever from park (P):
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible, if this procedure is used.
6 Speed Transmission
Apply the parking brake and switch the
E269652
ignition off before performing this
procedure. 1. Insert a screwdriver between the shifter
boot material and the trim ring (1) to
release the retainer tabs from the top
panel trim ring.
2. Lift the shifter boot (2) upwards.
E270857
134
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud

or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
E269653
3. Locate the lower white lever (3)

located on the side of the transmission
selector lever.
4. Using the screwdriver, move the lower
white lever (3) towards the front of the
transmission selector lever.
5. When holding the lower white lever (3)
in the forward position, move the
transmission selector lever out of the
park (P) position and into another gear.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
135
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It has
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and
transfer torque to the front wheels before
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not
present, the system is continuously making
adjustments to the torque distribution, in
an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering behavior, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every
time you switch the ignition on.
All components of the system are sealed
and do not require maintenance.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
The four-wheel drive system in your vehicle

is an intelligent system that continuously
monitors vehicle conditions and
automatically adjusts the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. It combines transparent
all-surface operation with highly capable
four-wheel drive. The four-wheel drive
system is always active and requires no
driver input, however the driver can
optimize more control by utilizing the
terrain management switch and low range
selection switch, mounted in the center
console, for the correct terrain conditions.
See Off-Road Driving (page 190).
136
Rear Axle
ELECTRONIC LOCKING When you switch the system on, if you do

not meet the required conditions for
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) electronic locking differential activation,
the appropriate information guiding you
Note: The electronic locking differential is through the activation process appears in
for off-road use only and is not for use on the information display.
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in Activating the Electronic Locking
increased tire wear, noise, vibration and Differential
damage to the axle.
Note: Do not use electronic locking
The electronic locking differential is a differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
device housed in the rear axle that allows Doing so will produce excessive noise,
both rear wheels to turn at the same vibration, increase tire wear and damage to
speed. The electronic locking differential the axle .
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate Note: If the electronic locking differential
the differential electronically and shift it has difficulty disengaging, release the
on the fly within the differential operating accelerator pedal and turn the steering
speed range. The differential is for use in wheel while rolling.
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
• The electronic locking differential does
not engage if your vehicle speed is too
high (above 35 km/h in Normal mode).
• The electronic locking differential
automatically disengages when your
vehicle speed is too high and
automatically re-engages when your
vehicle speed is low enough.
• The electronic locking differential may
not engage if you are cornering or if one
rear wheel is spinning. A message may
appear in the information display
informing you to release the E206626
accelerator.
• The speeds for engagement or To engage the electronic locking
disengagement change in different differential, press the centre console
terrain modes. mounted switch.
• The system has the ability to disable
the electronic locking differential during
driving maneuvers when necessary.
137
Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION Brake Inspection

Disc brake pads should be checked to
Disc brakes confirm that each disc brake pad lining has
Wet brake discs result in reduced braking a suitable amount of friction material for
efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when safe use.
driving from a car wash to remove the film
of water. Inspection and Verification
Note: Disc brake pads must be replaced as
ABS an axle set. Do not replace an individual disc
brake pad or disc brake pads on one brake
WARNING assembly only.
The system is designed to aid the 1. Using a suitable tool, such as an
driver. It is not intended to replace inspection mirror, look into the
your attention and judgment. You are inspection hole on the back of each
still responsible to drive with due care and disc brake caliper.
attention.
2. Inspect the inner and outer disc brake
pads to confirm each disc brake pad
The ABS helps you to maintain full steering lining measures 1.5 mm thick or more.
and directional stability when you brake
heavily in an emergency, by preventing the Note: See your authorized dealer if any disc
road wheels from locking. brake pad lining is under 1.5 mm thickness.
Inspect each brake caliper and anchor
Brake override bracket for corrosion, wear, or damage.
In the event that the accelerator pedal
Wear Adjustment
becomes stuck or entrapped, applying
steady and firm pressure to the brake Automatic adjustment of disc brake
pedal will both slow the vehicle and reduce friction material during brake application
engine power. occurs as follows:
If you experience this condition: • The piston slides within its bore to a
1. Apply the brakes and bring your vehicle new position, taking up the brake pad
to a safe stop. wear.
2. Switch the engine off. • The brake caliper moves on its guide
pins, taking up the brake pad wear.
3. Select park (P) (automatic
transmission only).
4. Apply the parking brake. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
interferences. If none are found and the
The anti-lock braking system does not
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
eliminate the risks when:
to a dealer.
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
138
Brakes
• You take corners too fast. All Vehicles

• The road surface is poor. Note: Do not press the release button while
Note: If the system activates, the brake pulling the lever up.
pedal may pulse and may travel further. To apply the parking brake:
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This 1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
is normal. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
fullest extent.
PARKING BRAKE To release the parking brake:
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.
Vehicles With Automatic
Transmission 2. Pull the lever up slightly.
3. Press the release button and push the
WARNING lever down.
Always set the parking brake fully
and leave your vehicle with the HILL START ASSIST
transmission selector lever in
position P.
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
parking brake. When you leave your
facing uphill move the transmission selector
vehicle, always apply the parking
lever to position P and turn the steering
brake and move the transmission selector
wheel away from the curb.
lever into position park (P).
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
You must remain in your vehicle once
facing downhill move the transmission
you have turned the system on.
selector lever to position P and turn the
steering wheel toward the curb. The system is active unless ESC
warning lamp is turned off. During all
Vehicles With Manual times, you are responsible for
Transmission controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required.
WARNING
If the engine is revved excessively or
Always set the parking brake fully. if a malfunction is detected, the
system will turn off and ESC warning
lamp will turn on.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and There is a short delay in the system
facing uphill select first gear and turn the activation of up to two seconds after
steering wheel away from the curb. the shifting the lever to drive (D) or
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and reverse (R) in vehicles with automatic
facing downhill select reverse gear and turn transmission.
the steering wheel toward the curb.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
139
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle will • No failure mode is present.
remain stationary on the slope for two to • Accelerator pedal is not depressed.
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your • Vehicle is completely stopped.
foot from the brake to the accelerator • Uphill: Gear shift lever should be in
pedal. The brakes are released position drive (D) for Automatic
automatically once the engine has transmission and in any position other
developed sufficient drive to prevent your than reverse for manual transmission.
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This • Downhill: Gear shift lever should be in
is an advantage when pulling away on a reverse (R).
slope, (for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into To disable the system, perform one of the
a parking space). following:
The system will turn on automatically on • Apply the parking brake.
any slope which can result in significant • Open any door.
vehicle rollback. • Drive off uphill without re-applying the
Note: Hill start assist is available in vehicles brake.
equipped with electronic stability control • Wait for one to two seconds after you
(ESC). remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Using Hill Start Assist • If the system is active in a forward gear,
select reverse gear.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your • If the system is active in neutral,
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep release the clutch pedal (Manual
the brake pedal pressed. transmission).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle • If the system is active in reverse gear,
is on a slope, the system will be select neutral.
activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the Switching the System On and Off
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
Note: You can only switch the system on
on the slope without rolling away for
and off if your vehicle has a manual
approximately two or three seconds.
transmission.
This hold time will automatically be
extended if you are in the process of Note: The system will remain on or off
driving off. depending on how it was last set.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The Your vehicle comes with this feature
brakes will be released automatically. already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
Enable and Disable the System display. See General Information (page
77).
You can enable the system only if the
following conditions are met:
• The engine is running.
• All doors are fully closed.
• The parking brake is fully disengaged.
140
Traction Control (If Equipped)
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL

Traction control forms part of the stability
control system.
Note: The system automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
Note: Switching off the stability control will
turn off the system.
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or
mud), turning the system off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power.
Traction control is an enhanced feature of
stability control system and automatically
detects the wheel spin when you
accelerate. If this situation occurs, the
system applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and if necessary, reduces
engine power.
Note: Shifting to 4x4 Low deactivates
engine traction control but brake traction
control remains active.
To switch off the traction control, See
Using Stability Control (page 143).
141
Stability Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a driving condition activates either the

stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
WARNINGS
conditions:
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof • The stability and traction control light
racks, suspension, steering system, flashes.
tire construction and wheel and tire size • Your vehicle slows down.
may change the handling characteristics • Reduced engine power.
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability • A vibration in the brake pedal.
control system. In addition, installing any • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with • If the driving condition is severe and
and adversely affect the electronic stability your foot is not on the brake, the brake
control system. Install any aftermarket pedal may move as the systems
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from applies higher brake forces.
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk The stability control system has several
of interfering with the electronic stability features built into it to help you maintain
control sensors. Reducing the control of your vehicle:
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased Electronic Stability Control
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
rollover, personal injury and death. to prevent skids or lateral slides by
Remember that even advanced applying brakes to one or more of the
technology cannot defy the laws of wheels individually and, if necessary,
physics. It’s always possible to lose reducing engine power.
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive Roll Stability Control
driving on any road condition can cause The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
you to lose control of your vehicle to prevent rollovers by detecting your
increasing the risk of personal injury or vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
property damage. Activation of the it changes by applying the brakes to one
electronic stability control system is an or more wheels individually.
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road; Curve Control
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, to follow the road when cornering severely
personal injury and death. If your electronic or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
stability control system activates, SLOW Control operates by reducing engine power
DOWN. and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
or more of the wheels individually.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
142
Stability Control (If Equipped)
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 141).
E207884
B
B
A
A B A
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL

Note: The system is automatically
activated when you start the engine.
To switch off the stability control, press
the stablity control button on the floor
console.
143
WARNING
Before driving off-road it is
absolutely essential that
in-experienced drivers become fully
familiar with the vehicle's controls. In
particular, Sport mode and Hill Descent
Control (HDC).
Hill descent control (HDC) operates in

conjunction with stability control (ESC) to
provide greater control when off-road,
particularly when descending steep slopes.
HDC operation is fully automatic when
engaged.
Engine braking controls the speed of the
E216471
descent during an off-road hill descent. If
engine braking alone is insufficient to Note: HDC will be active at speeds less
control the vehicle's speed, HDC will slow than 35 km/h and deactivated above
the vehicle using the braking system. 40 km/h but will not turn off until vehicle
Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse gear exceeds 60 km/h.
in manual transmission vehicles. Note: HDC will turn off when you switch
Note: Use HDC only in drive (D), reverse the ignition off.
(R) or sport (S) mode in automatic The HDC switch will illuminate
transmission vehicles. When in drvie (D), continuously to indicate that
the vehicle will select the most appropriate HDC is fully active.
gear.
HDC will temporarily deactivate during the
USING HILL DESCENT following conditions:
CONTROL • The brakes are hot. Operation resumes
once the brakes cool down.
Selecting HDC • The stability control indicator on
warning lamp is illuminated and
Select HDC at speeds less than 60 km/h. operating.
To select HDC, press the hill descent
control switch located on the floor console.
144
HDC Operation Note: HDC assistance will fade out

gradually if you switch the system off. This
is to prevent the loss of control if you press
the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistance
is still required, you can switch back the HDC
on. The control will resume at a speed the
vehicle is travelling when the pedal is
released.
Note: You may hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
Note: When HDC is operating, the ESC on
warning lamp will flash.
HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is
within the specified range even if the
system is on permanently during off-road
driving.
E206132
Cruise control switches on the steering

wheel allow you to control your hill descent
speed. SET + increases the speed and SET
- decreases the speed.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 km/h increments.
Pressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal will increase or decrease the speed
respectively.
Note: Each gear has a pre-determined
minimum speed.
Note: Descent speed will only increase on
a slope steep enough to provide additional
momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+
switch on a gentle slope may not increase
the speed.
Note: The Brakes will override the HDC if
the brake pedal is pressed. The system
resumes on the release of the brake pedal.
145
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: When a trailer is connected to your

vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
WARNINGS
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
To help avoid personal injury, always connected to prevent the alert.
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system. The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
The system may not detect objects vehicle. The system turns on automatically
with surfaces that absorb reflection. whenever you switch the ignition on.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result The system can be switched off through
in a crash. the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
Traffic control systems, inclement shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
weather, air brakes, external motors General Information (page 77).
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may If a fault is present in the system, a warning
cause reduced performance or false alerts. message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
The system may not detect small or (page 85).
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
REAR PARKING AID
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be The rear sensors are only active when the
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See transmission is in reverse (R). As your
Principle of Operation (page 34). vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the When the obstacle is less than 30 cm
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and away, the warning sounds continuously. If
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors the system detects a stationary or receding
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be object farther than 30 cm from the corners
affected. Do not clean the sensors with of the bumper, the tone sounds for only
sharp objects. three seconds. Once the system detects
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to an object approaching, the warning sounds
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned again.
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
146
The indicator displays:

• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID

The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
E130178 park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
Coverage area of up to 1.8 m from the rear
bumper. There may be decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 5 km/h
or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 5 km/h or
less. E187330
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of Coverage area of up to 70 cm from the
less than 5 km/h and a moving object front bumper. The coverage area
is approaching the rear of your vehicle decreases at the outer corners.
at a speed of less than 5 km/h.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
The system provides audio warnings only a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
when your vehicle is moving or when your moves closer to an object, the warning
vehicle is stationary and the detected tone repeat rate increases. The warning
obstacle is less than 30 cm away from the tone sounds continuously when an object
bumper. is 30 cm or less from the front bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If You can switch the system off through the
Equipped) information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
The system provides obstacle distance shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
indication through the information display. General Information (page 77). If your
The distance indicator displays when the vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
transmission is in reverse (R). switch the system off by pressing the
button.
147
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If ACTIVE PARK ASSIST

Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display. You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
The indicator displays: times, you are responsible for
• As the distance to the obstacle controlling your vehicle, supervising the
decreases the indicator blocks system and intervening, if required. Failure
illuminate and move towards the to take care may result in the loss of
vehicle icon. control of your vehicle, serious personal
• If there is no obstacle detected, the injury or death.
distance indicator blocks are grayed The system is designed to aid the
out. driver. It is not intended to replace
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the your attention and judgment. You are
front sensing system provides audio still responsible to drive with due care and
warnings when your vehicle is moving and attention.
the detected obstacle is moving towards The sensors may not detect objects
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, in heavy rain or other conditions that
the audio warning will be stopped after 2 cause interference.
seconds. Visual indication is always
Active park assist does not apply the
present in reverse (R).
brakes under any circumstances.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual Note: The blind spot information system
transmission), the front sensing system does not detect traffic alongside or behind
provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle during an active park assist
your vehicle is moving below a speed of maneuver.
8 km/h and an obstacle is located inside Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
the detection area. Once the vehicle is process and may require you to shift your
stationary, the audio warning will be transmission multiple times. Follow the
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual on-screen instructions until you complete
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the the parking process.
obstacles detected are within 30 cm, the
The system detects an available parallel
visual indication remains on.
parking space and automatically steers
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the your vehicle (hands-free) while you control
system provides visual indication only the accelerator, transmission and brakes.
when your vehicle is moving at 8 km/h or The system visually and audibly guides you
below and an obstacle is located inside to park your vehicle.
the detection area. Once your vehicle is
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
stationary, the visual indication will stop
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
after 4 seconds.
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or pushing the active park
assist button.
148
The system may not operate correctly in Note: Following a change in tire size, the
any of the following conditions: system must recalibrate and operation may
• You use a spare tire or a tire be impaired for a short time.
significantly worn more than the other Do not use the system if:
tires.
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
• One or more tires are improperly or other object near the sensors on the
inflated. front or rear of your vehicle.
• You try to park on a tight curve. • You have attached an overhanging
• Something passes between the front object to the roof. For example, a
bumper and the parking space. For surfboard.
example, a pedestrian or cyclist. • A foreign object damages or obstructs
• The edge of the neighboring parking the sensors.
vehicle is high off the ground. For • The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed example, when using a mini-spare tire.
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For Using Active Park Assist
example, during heavy rain, snow or Press the button to turn the
fog. system on or off.
E146186
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large When driving at a speed less than 35 km/h,
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can the system automatically scans both sides
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean of your vehicle for an available parking
the sensors with sharp objects. space. The system displays a message and
Note: The sensors may not detect objects a corresponding graphic to indicate it is
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves searching for a parking space. Use the
or cause ultrasonic interference. For direction indicator to select searching
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air either to the left hand side or right hand
brakes or horns. side of your vehicle. If the direction
indicator is not used, the system defaults
to the passenger side of your vehicle.
E130107
149
When the system finds a suitable space it Note: The system always offers the last
displays a message and a tone sounds. detected parking space. For example, if your
Stop your vehicle and follow the vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
instructions on the display screen. If your are driving, it offers the last detected space.
vehicle is moving very slowly, you may Note: If driven above approximately
need to pull forward a short distance 35 km/h, the display screen shows a
before the system is ready to park. message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
Note: You can also activate the system speed.
after you drive partially or completely pass
the parking space. To do so, press the active Automatic Steering into Parking
park assist button and the system informs Space
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space. Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 9 km/h or
the maneuver is interrupted, for example
Note: You must observe that the selected driver input is detected, the system switches
space remains clear of obstructions at all off and you need to take full control of your
times in the maneuver. vehicle.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within When you shift the transmission into
1.5 m and as parallel to the other vehicles reverse (R), with your hands off the
as possible while passing a parking space. steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space. The system displays instructions
to move your vehicle back and forth in the
space.
E130108
When automatic steering is complete, the

When you think your vehicle has enough
system displays a message and a chime
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
sounds, indicating that the active park
solid tone from the parking aid
assist process is finished. You are
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
responsible for checking the parking job
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
and making any necessary corrections
to a complete stop.
before leaving your vehicle.
150
Deactivating the Park Assist Certain vehicle conditions can also

Feature deactivate the system, such as:
Manually deactivate the system by: • Traction control has activated.
• Pressing the active park assist button • There is an anti-lock brake system
during an active maneuver. activation or failure.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an If a problem occurs with the system, a
active maneuver. warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
• Driving above approximately 35 km/h may occur in normal operation. For
for 30 seconds during an active park recurring or frequent system faults, contact
search. an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
• Driving above 9 km/h during automatic serviced.
steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 1.5 m or closer than 40 cm away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 35 km/h.
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect,
the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time.
151
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling
forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from
a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
WARNINGS
REAR VIEW CAMERA Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
WARNINGS the camera will be out of position
The rear view camera system is a and the video image may be incorrect. All
reverse aid supplement device that guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
still requires the driver to use it in door is ajar. Failure to follow this
conjunction with the interior and exterior instruction could result in personal injury.
mirrors for maximum coverage. Use caution when turning camera
Objects that are close to either features on or off when the
corner of the bumper or under the transmission is not in park (P). Make
bumper, might not be seen on the sure your vehicle is not moving.
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system. The rear view camera system provides a
Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure video image of the area behind your
to follow this instruction could result vehicle.
in the loss of control of your vehicle, During operation, lines appear in the
personal injury or death. display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
152
The camera may not operate correctly

under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
E142435
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera is on the liftgate near
the license plate. You can access the rear view camera
system settings in the display screen. See
Using the Rear View Camera Settings (page 313).
System
Camera guidelines
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
the transmission in reverse (R). are only available when the transmission is
The system uses three types of guides to in reverse (R).
help you see what is behind your vehicle: Note: The centerline is only available if
• Active guidelines: Show the intended active or fixed guidelines are on.
path of your vehicle while reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
153
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel
A B C D E position. The active guidelines do not
show when the steering wheel position is
straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)
F
E142436
A Active guidelines
B Centerline
C Fixed guideline: Green zone
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
E Fixed guideline: Red zone
F Rear bumper
Active guidelines only show with fixed E190459

guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines The system will provide an image of your
toward an intended path. If the steering vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
wheel position changes while reversing, will highlight green, yellow and red when
your vehicle might deviate from the original the parking aid sensors detect an object in
intended path. the coverage area.
154
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when

the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay

Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
10 km/h. This occurs when the rear camera
delay feature is on.
155
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On

Press the cruise control button.
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the The indicator appears in the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise information display.
control when your vehicle speed is greater E71340
than 30 km/h.
Setting the Cruise Speed
USING CRUISE CONTROL 1. Drive to desired speed.

2. Press SET+ or SET-.
WARNINGS 3. Take your foot off the accelerator
Do not use cruise control on winding pedal.
roads, in heavy traffic or when the Note: The indicator changes color.
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious Changing the Set Speed
injury or death.
• Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
When you are going downhill, your speed in small increments.
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not • Press the accelerator or brake pedal
apply the brakes. until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h the control when you reach the desired
below the set speed when driving uphill. speed.
To help the system to maintain the set Canceling the Set Speed
speed when going downhill, downshift to
a lower gear. Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed

Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off

Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press the cruise control button when the
system is in standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
E201284
The cruise controls are on the steering

wheel.
156
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE The system adjusts your vehicle speed to

maintain the set gap between you and the
CONTROL vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
WARNINGS
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
Always pay close attention to drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
changing road conditions when using at all times.
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing Note: Using non-Ford branded front
to pay attention to the road may result in mounted accessories could cause sensor
a crash, serious injury or death. obstruction and result in a loss of radar
functionality.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a The system uses a radar sensor that
highway, on roads with intersections projects a beam directly in front of your
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or vehicle.
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
E248386
Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving The adaptive cruise controls are on the
vehicles below 10 km/h. steering wheel.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
road. On
Adaptive cruise control does not Press and release CAN/OFF.
detect oncoming vehicles in the The indicator, current gap setting
same lane. and set speed appear in the
E144529
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash information display.
warning or avoidance system.
157
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
E164805 intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed crash, serious injury or death.
1. Drive to your preferred speed. Adaptive cruise control only warns

of vehicles detected by the radar
2. Press and release RES+ or SET-. sensor. In some cases there may be
3. A green indicator light, the current gap no warning or a delayed warning. You
setting and your set speed appear in should always apply the brakes when
the information display. necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
E164805 Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
5. A lead vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you. • The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly • The vehicle in front of you moves out
from the set speed displayed in the of the lane you are in or out of range of
information display. the radar.
• Your vehicle speed falls below
20 km/h.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
158
If the system determines that its maximum

braking level is not sufficient, an audible Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar Graphic Distance Gap Dynamic
displays on the windshield and you must display, behavior
take immediate action. bars indic-
ated
Setting the Gap Distance between
vehicles
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in 1 Closest. Sport.
front by pressing the gap control.
2 Close. Normal.
3 Medium. Normal.
4 Far. Comfort.
Each time you switch the system on, it

selects the last chosen gap setting.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent

and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
E248383 appropriate to the driving conditions.
A Gap decrease. Overriding the Set Speed

B Gap increase. WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you

override the set speed and gap distance.
E164805 When you override the system,
the green indicator light
E144529
The selected gap appears in the illuminates and the vehicle
information display as shown by the bars image does not appear in the information
in the image. display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
159
Changing the Set Speed Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
• Press and release RES+ or SET- to appears in the information display.
change the set speed in small Automatic braking releases.
increments.
Note: Shift to a lower gear (manual
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal transmission only) to avoid automatic
until you reach your preferred speed. cancellation.
Press and release RES+ or SET-.
• Press and hold RES+ or SET- to Hilly Condition Usage
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when Select a lower gear when the system is
you reach your preferred speed. active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
The system may apply the brakes to slow example in mountainous areas. The
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set system needs additional engine braking in
speed displays continuously in the these situations to reduce the load on the
information display when the system is vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
active. it from overheating.
Canceling the Set Speed Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
Press and release CAN/OFF or tap the an extended period of time. This allows the
brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Resuming the Set Speed
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Press and release RES+. Your vehicle Off
speed returns to the previously set speed
and gap setting. The set speed displays Press and release CAN/OFF when the
continuously in the information display system is in standby mode, or switch the
when the system is active. ignition off.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of Note: You erase the set speed and gap
the set speed and intend to return to it. setting when you switch the system off.
Note: Shift to a lower gear (manual
transmission only) to avoid automatic
Detection Issues
cancellation. WARNINGS
Automatic Cancellation On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
The system does not operate below infrastructures, for example bridges,
20 km/h. tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
Automatic cancellation can also occur if: the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
• The tires lose traction. responsible for controlling your vehicle,
• The engine speed is too low. supervising the system and intervening, if
• You apply the parking brake. required.
If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
160
The radar sensor has a limited field of view. In these cases, the system may brake late
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
a vehicle later than expected in some take action when necessary.
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does If something hits the front end of your
not illuminate if the system does not vehicle or damage occurs, the
detect a vehicle in front of you. radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
System Not Available

Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E71621
Detection issues can occur:

E267381
A With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected A message displays if something obstructs
once they have moved fully into the radar signals from the sensor. The
your lane sensor is behind the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
B Motorcyclists may be detected
does not function when something
late, or not at all
obstructs the radar signal.
C There may be issues with the
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
detection of vehicles in front
behind a fascia panel.
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
161
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:

Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the Do not use the system in these conditions
road may interfere with the radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise

Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise

control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking does not activate.
162
Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES Switching the System On and Off

WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
CONTROL (If Equipped) standby mode. The information display
prompts you to set a speed. Press LIM
CNCL/OFF again to switch the system off.
Principle of Operation
Setting the Speed Limit
WARNING
When you are going downhill, your Press SET- with the limiter in standby
vehicle speed may increase above mode to set the limiter to the current
the set speed. The system will not vehicle speed. The set speed is stored and
apply the brakes but a warning displays. appears in the information display.
Failure to follow this warning could result Press RES+ or SET- to select your desired
in serious personal injury or death. speed limit. The set speed is stored and
appears in the information display.
The system allows you to set a speed to Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the limiter
which your vehicle becomes limited. The and place it in standby mode. The
set speed sets the effective maximum information display confirms the system
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily is in standby mode by displaying the set
exceed the set speed if required, for speed limit as crossed out.
example to overtake.
Press RES+ to resume the limiter. The
Using the Speed Limiter information display confirms this is on by
showing the set speed again.
Note: If you briefly press the accelerator,
for example when overtaking another Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
vehicle, the system temporarily turns off. Limiter Set Speed
The system is operated by the controls Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to
mounted on the steering wheel. temporarily switch the system off. The
speed limiter set speed resumes when your
vehicle speed drops below the set speed
limit.
System Warnings
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the
set speed indicator in the information
display flashes and a tone sounds.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
a warning appears in the information
display.
E269730
163
Driving Aids
Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter Switching the System On and Off
(If Equipped)
Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
standby mode. The information display
WARNING prompts you to set a speed or show the
You are responsible for controlling detected speed limit as the set speed. The
your vehicle at all times. The system system does not limit the vehicle speed in
is designed to be an aid and does not standby mode. Press LIM CNCL/OFF with
relieve you of your responsibility to drive the limiter in standby mode to switch the
with due care and attention. Failure to system off.
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal Setting the Speed Limit
injury or death. • Press RES+ with the limiter in standby
mode to set the limiter to the detected
Note: When driving between countries that speed limit.
use different units of measure (miles per • Press SET- with the limiter in standby
hour or kilometers per hour), there may be mode to set the limiter to the current
a delay before the system changes between vehicle speed.
speed limit units. During this time, the
display screen for the speed limiter may • Press RES+ or SET- to gradually
differ from the actual posted speed limit. change the current set speed to your
For best performance, make sure that the desired speed limit.
navigation SD card is in the navigation • Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the
media port. limiter and place it in standby mode.
The system allows you to automatically • Press RES+ to resume the limiter.
limit your vehicle speed to the speed limit The limit speed automatically adapts to
that is detected by the Traffic Sign the speed limit detected by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system. Recognition system. The system does not
You can change the speed limiter mode react to speed limits shown with a
between manual and intelligent in the supplementary sign by the Traffic Sign
information display. See General Recognition system. If there is no speed
Information (page 77). limit information available, the limiter
switches to standby mode.
You can select a permanent set speed
tolerance that is in addition to the detected Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
speed limit through the tolerance menu in Limiter Set Speed
the information display. See General
Information (page 77). Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to
temporarily switch the system off. The
speed limiter set speed resumes when your
vehicle speed drops below the set speed
limit.
164
Driving Aids
System Warnings The system is operated by the controls

mounted on the steering wheel.
If the set speed is automatically set to a
lower value than your current vehicle
speed, the set speed indicator in the
information display flashes and you hear
an audible warning tone if you are
continuously exceeding the set speed.
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the
display flashes and you hear an audible
warning tone.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
only the set speed indicator in the E269729
information display flashes.
If the Traffic Sign Recognition system Switching the System On and Off
detects a speed limit outside the Press LIM to set the limiter in standby
operational speed range, you hear a single mode. The information display prompts
warning tone and the system switches to you to set a speed. Press LIM again to
standby mode. switch the system off.
Setting the Speed Limit

SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL Press SET+ or SET- with the limiter in
standby mode to set the limiter to the
Principle of Operation current vehicle speed. The set speed is
stored and appears in the information
WARNING display.
When you are going downhill, your Press SET+ or SET- to select your desired
vehicle speed may increase above speed limit. The set speed is stored and
the set speed. The system will not appears in the information display.
apply the brakes but a warning displays. Press CAN to cancel the limiter and place
Failure to follow this warning could result it in standby mode. The information display
in serious personal injury or death. confirms the system is in standby mode
by displaying the set speed limit as crossed
The system allows you to set a speed to out.
which your vehicle becomes limited. The Press RES to resume the limiter. The
set speed sets the effective maximum information display confirms this is on by
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily showing the set speed again.
exceed the set speed if required, for
example to overtake.
Using the Speed Limiter

Note: If you briefly press the accelerator,
for example when overtaking another
vehicle, the system temporarily turns off.
165
Driving Aids
Intentionally Exceeding the Speed You can change the speed limiter mode
Limiter Set Speed between manual and intelligent in the
information display. See General
Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to Information (page 77).
temporarily switch the system off. The
speed limiter set speed resumes when your You can select a permanent set speed
vehicle speed drops below the set speed tolerance that is in addition to the detected
limit. speed limit through the tolerance menu in
the information display. See General
System Warnings Information (page 77).
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the Switching the System On and Off
display flashes and a tone sounds. Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
standby mode. The information display
If you intentionally exceed the set speed, prompts you to set a speed or show the
a warning appears in the information detected speed limit as the set speed. The
display. system does not limit the vehicle speed in
standby mode. Press LIM CNCL/OFF with
Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter the limiter in standby mode to switch the
(If Equipped)
system off.
WARNING Setting the Speed Limit
You are responsible for controlling • Press RES+ with the limiter in standby
your vehicle at all times. The system mode to set the limiter to the detected
is designed to be an aid and does not speed limit.
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to • Press SET- with the limiter in standby
follow this instruction could result in the mode to set the limiter to the current
loss of control of your vehicle, personal vehicle speed.
injury or death. • Press RES+ or SET- to gradually
change the current set speed to your
Note: When driving between countries that desired speed limit.
use different units of measure (miles per • Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the
hour or kilometers per hour), there may be limiter and place it in standby mode.
a delay before the system changes between • Press RES+ to resume the limiter.
speed limit units. During this time, the
display screen for the speed limiter may The limit speed automatically adapts to
differ from the actual posted speed limit. the speed limit detected by the Traffic Sign
For best performance, make sure that the Recognition system. The system does not
navigation SD card is in the navigation react to speed limits shown with a
media port. supplementary sign by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system. If there is no speed
The system allows you to automatically limit information available, the limiter
limit your vehicle speed to the speed limit switches to standby mode.
that is detected by the Traffic Sign
Recognition system.
166
Driving Aids
Intentionally Exceeding the Speed WARNINGS

Limiter Set Speed Take regular rest breaks if you feel
Firmly depress the accelerator pedal to tired. Do not wait for the system to
temporarily switch the system off. The warn you.
speed limiter set speed resumes when your Certain driving styles may result in
vehicle speed drops below the set speed the system warning you even if you
limit. are not feeling tired.
System Warnings In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
If the set speed is automatically set to a function. Rain, snow and spray can
lower value than your current vehicle all limit sensor performance.
speed, the set speed indicator in the
information display flashes and you hear The system will not operate if the
an audible warning tone if you are sensor cannot track the road lane
continuously exceeding the set speed. markings.
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the If damage occurs in the immediate
set speed indicator in the information area surrounding the sensor, have
display flashes and you hear an audible your vehicle checked as soon as
warning tone. possible.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed, The system may not correctly
only the set speed indicator in the operate if your vehicle is fitted with
information display flashes. a suspension kit not approved by us.
If the Traffic Sign Recognition system
detects a speed limit outside the Note: The system may not operate correctly
operational speed range, you hear a single if you modify the ride height.
warning tone and the system switches to Note: Keep the windshield free from
standby mode. obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice.
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
WARNINGS activates at speeds above 64 km/h. When
You are responsible for controlling below the activation speed, the information
your vehicle at all times. The system display informs the driver that the system
is designed to be an aid and does not is unavailable.
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
The system may not function if the
sensor is blocked.
167
Driving Aids
System Display
When active, the system runs
automatically in the background and only
issues a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your

driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain E131358
threshold, the system alerts you using a
The current assessment of your alertness
chime and a message in the information
is within a typical range.
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT

Switch the system on or off using the
E131359
When active, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving The current assessment of your alertness
behavior in relation to the lane markings indicates that you should rest as soon as
and other factors. safely possible.
The status bar travels from left to right as
System Warnings
the calculated alertness level decreases.
Note: The system does not issue warnings As the meter approaches the rest icon, the
below approximately 64 km/h. color turns from green to yellow to red.
The warning system has two stages. First, The yellow position indicates the first
the system issues a temporary warning warning is active and the red position
that you need to take a rest. This message indicates the second warning is active.
only appears for a short time. If the system Note: If you have recently received a
detects further reduction in driving warning, you should consider resting, even
alertness, it may issue another warning if the current assessment is within the
that remains in the information display for typical range.
a longer time. You can press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the warning.
168
Driving Aids
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the WARNINGS

road lane markings, or if your vehicle speed The system may not operate
drops below approximately 64 km/h, the properly if the sensor is blocked.
alertness level changes to grey for a short Keep the windshield free from
time and the information display informs obstruction.
you that the system is unavailable.
If damage occurs in the immediate
Resetting the System area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as
You can reset the system by either: possible.
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening Note: The system works above 64 km/h.
and closing the driver’s door. Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
Equipped) mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
WARNINGS The system may detect a light grip or touch
You are responsible for controlling on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
your vehicle at all times. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not Note: The system may not function if the
relieve you of your responsibility to drive camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
with due care and attention. Failure to damaged or dirty.
injury or death.
Always drive with due care and
attention when using and operating
the controls and features on your
vehicle.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can
all limit sensor performance.
E249505
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The sensor may incorrectly track lane
markings as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or
missed warning.
169
Driving Aids
When you switch the system on and the

system detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur, the system
notifies or assists you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and
information display. Depending on the
feature operation mode you select, the
system provides a warning by vibrating the
steering wheel or a steering assistance by
gently counter steering your vehicle back
into the lane.
Switching the System On and Off E165515
Note: The system on or off setting is stored Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey vibration when the system detects an
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey, unintended lane departure.
it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
E132099
Press the button on the direction indicator

E165516
stalk to switch the system on or off.
Aid only – Provides a steering assistance
System Settings toward the lane center when the system
The system has optional setting menus detects an unintended lane departure.
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
170
Driving Aids
System Display
E165517
E151660
A Alert
B Aid If you switch the system on in alert mode,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
Alert + Aid – Provides a steering assistance markings appears in the information
toward the lane center. display.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the If you switch the system on in aid or alert
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the and aid mode, a separate white icon also
vehicle, the system provides a steering appears, or in some vehicles arrows display
wheel vibration. with the lane markings.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate When you switch off the system, the lane
general zone coverage. They do not provide marking graphics do not display.
exact zone parameters. While the system is on, the color of the
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity lane markings change to indicate the
of the steering wheel vibration used for the system status.
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting Gray: Indicates that the system is
does not affect the aid mode. temporarily unable to provide a warning
• Low. or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
• Normal.
• High. • Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
171
Driving Aids
See Troubleshooting for additional Red: Indicates that the system is providing
information. or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or The system can be temporarily suppressed
intervention on the indicated side. at any time by the following:
Yellow: Indicates that the system is • Quick braking.
providing or has just provided a lane • Fast acceleration.
keeping aid intervention.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane marking.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
172
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Alert and Aid mode?
High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
The system is designed to detect vehicles

that may have entered the blind spot zone.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION The detection area is on both sides of your
SYSTEM (If Equipped) vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 4 m
WARNINGS beyond the rear bumper. The detection
area extends to approximately 18 m
Do not use the blind spot information beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle
system as a replacement for using speed is greater than 48 km/h to alert you
the interior and exterior mirrors or of faster approaching vehicles.
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system Note: The system does not prevent contact
is not a replacement for careful driving. with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
The system may not operate or other infrastructures.
properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, Using the Blind Spot Information
heavy rain and spray. Always drive with System
due care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
10 km/h.
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
E255695
173
Driving Aids
Vehicles with Manual Transmission The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
The system turns on when all of the
following occur: Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
10 km/h. stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: The system does not operate in Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
reverse (R). performance.
If the sensors become blocked, a message
System Lights and Messages may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 85). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 85).

You can switch the system off using the
E142442 information display. See General
Information (page 77). When you switch
When the system detects a vehicle, an the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior and a message displays. When you switch
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle the system on or off, the alert indicators
is coming from. If you turn the direction flash twice.
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes. Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection Note: The system may not correctly operate
zone. when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
Blocked Sensors by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
E205199
174
Driving Aids
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If The system is designed to alert you of

vehicles approaching from the sides when
Equipped) you shift into reverse (R).
WARNINGS Using the Cross Traffic Alert

Do not use the cross traffic alert System
system as a replacement for using The system is designed to detect vehicles
the interior and exterior mirrors or that approach with a speed up to 60 km/h.
looking over your shoulder before reversing Coverage decreases when the sensors are
out of a parking space. The cross traffic partially, mostly or fully obstructed. Slowly
alert system is not a replacement for reversing helps increase the coverage area
careful driving. and effectiveness.
The system may not operate The system turns on when you start the
properly during severe weather engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
conditions, for example snow, ice, system turns off when you shift out of
heavy rain and spray. Always drive with reverse (R).
due care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only

partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
175
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on could alert you even when there is nothing
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
zone coverage on that side is severely passing in the distance.
reduced. Blocked Sensors
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper

on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
E142442
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
When the system detects a vehicle, an stickers, repair compound or other objects.
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
on the side the approaching vehicle is
performance.
coming from. A tone sounds and a
message appears in the information
display.
176
Driving Aids
If the sensors are blocked, a message may To permanently switch the system off,
appear in the information display when contact an authorized dealer.
you shift into reverse (R). See
Information Messages (page 85).
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION
System Limitations (If Equipped)
The system may not correctly operate

when any of the following occur: Principle of Operation
• The sensors are blocked. WARNINGS
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects The system is designed to aid the
are obstructing the sensors. driver. It is not intended to replace
• Vehicles approach at speeds greater your attention and judgment. You are
than 60 km/h. still responsible to drive with due care and
• The vehicle speed is greater than attention.
12 km/h. At all times, you are responsible for
• You reverse out of an angled parking controlling your vehicle, supervising
space. the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
System Errors the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See General Information (page The system may not function if the
77). sensor is blocked.
Switching the System Off and On Note: In cold and severe weather conditions
You can temporarily switch the system off the system may not function. Rain, snow,
using the information display. See General spray and large contrasts in lighting can all
Information (page 77). When you switch prevent the sensor from functioning
system off, a message displays. See correctly.
Information Messages (page 85). Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs
Note: The system turns on each time you in the immediate area surrounding the
switch the ignition on and you shift into sensor.
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
system off, it turns on the next time you not approved by us, the system may not
switch the ignition on. correctly function.
Note: The system may not correctly operate Note: Always fit Ford original parts when
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
trailer tow module and tow bar approved reduce system performance.
by us, the system turns off when you attach
Note: The system may not detect all traffic
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
signs and may incorrectly read signs.
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off Note: Keep the windshield free from
when you attach a trailer. obstructions for example bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.
177
Driving Aids
Note: The system is designed to detect The system displays recognizable traffic
traffic signs meeting the Vienna convention. signs in four stages as follows:
Note: Traffic sign data provided by the 1. All new traffic signs appear brighter
navigation system contains information than the others in the display.
integrated to the data carrier release. 2. After a predetermined time they
The sensor is behind the interior rear view display normally.
mirror. It continuously monitors road signs 3. After a predetermined distance they
to inform you of the current maximum are greyed out.
speed limit and overtaking regulations. 4. After another predetermined distance
The system detects recognizable traffic they are deleted.
signs, for example: If the system detects a supplementary
• Speed limit signs. traffic sign, it displays below the respective
• No overtaking signs. traffic sign. For example, when passing a
reduced speed limit in wet road conditions
• Speed limit cancellation signs. sign.
• No overtaking cancellation signs.
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
Using Traffic Sign Recognition stored traffic sign data may influence the
indicated speed limit value.
Setting the System Speed Warning
The system has a number of speed
warning levels that you can set using the You can switch the system on and off using
information display. See General the information display. See General
Information (page 77). Information (page 77).
Note: The system remembers the last
System Display setting when you start your vehicle.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
E132994 continuously monitor the system. If
The system can display two traffic signs a fault is detected, a message displays in
in parallel. the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
You can view the status at any time using ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
the information display. switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
178
Driving Aids
WARNINGS Adaptive Learning

If the system detects an error, you The electronic power steering system
may not feel a difference in the adaptive learning helps correct road
steering, however a serious condition irregularities and improves overall handling
may exist. Obtain immediate service from and steering feel. It communicates with
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may the brake system to help operate
result in loss of steering control. advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
Your vehicle has an electric power steering the battery is disconnected or a new
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No battery installed, you must drive your
maintenance is required. vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
If your vehicle loses electrical power while systems.
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
Equipped)
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase WARNINGS
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents You are responsible for controlling
overheating and permanent damage to your vehicle at all times. The system
the steering system. You do not lose the is designed to be an aid and does not
ability to steer your vehicle manually. relieve you of your responsibility to drive
Typical steering and driving maneuvers with due care and attention. Failure to
allow the system to cool and return to follow this instruction could result in the
normal operation. loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Steering Tips The system does not detect vehicles
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: that are driving in a different
direction, cyclists or animals. Failure
• Correct tire pressures. to take care may result in the loss of
• Uneven tire wear. control of your vehicle, serious personal
• Loose or worn suspension injury or death.
components. The system does not operate during
• Loose or worn steering components. hard acceleration or steering. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or
• Improper vehicle alignment.
personal injury.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
179
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
The system may fail or operate with
reduced function during cold and E156130
severe weather conditions. Snow,
ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect If your vehicle is rapidly approaching
the system. Keep the front camera and another stationary vehicle, a vehicle
radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take traveling in the same direction as yours, or
care may result in the loss of control of a pedestrian within your driving path, the
your vehicle, serious personal injury or system provides three levels of
death. functionality:
In situations where the vehicle
camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of E255268
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death. 1. Alert
The system cannot help prevent all 2. Brake Support
crashes. Do not rely on this system 3. Active Braking
to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and Alert: When active, the system provides a
speed. flashing visual warning and an audible
warning sound.
Note: To achieve full system performance, Brake Support: Assists the driver in
you must break in the braking system. See reducing collision speed by preparing the
General Information (page 138). brake system for rapid braking. Brake
support does not automatically activate
Note: The warning indicator may flash for the brakes, but if the driver presses the
a short period of time when you start your brake pedal even lightly, brake support
vehicle. could add additional braking up to full
force.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System Active Braking: Active braking may
activate if the system determines that a
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active collision is imminent. The system may help
at speeds above approximately 5 km/h the driver reduce impact damage or avoid
and pedestrian detection is active at the crash completely.
speeds up to 80 km/h.
180
Driving Aids
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist

alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert E190004
This function provides a graphical If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is

indication of the time gap to other small, a red visual indication displays to
preceding vehicles traveling in the same the driver.
direction. The distance indication and alert
screen in the information display shows a Note: Distance indication and alert
graphic similar to the one that follows. deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap

100 km/h Normal Grey >25 m >0.9sec
100 km/h Normal Yellow 17–25 m 0.6sec - 0.9sec
100 km/h Normal Red <17 m <0.6sec
Blocked Sensors
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings
You can adjust alert and distance alert
sensitivity to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 77).
You can switch the distance alert and
indication function off using the
information display controls. See General
If required, you can switch active braking
off using the information display controls.
See General Information (page 77).
Note: Active braking automatically turns
on every time you switch the ignition on.
E271779
181
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor ahead. With the front camera obstructed,
or camera appears in the information the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
display, the radar signals or camera images respond to pedestrians or stationary
are obstructed. The radar sensor is located vehicles and the system performance on
behind a fascia cover near the driver side moving vehicles reduces. The following
of the lower grille. With an obstructed table lists possible causes and actions for
radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does when this message displays.
not function and cannot detect a vehicle
Cause Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
or obstructed in some way.
tion.
Wait a short time. It may take several
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
minutes for the radar to detect that there
but the message remains in the display.
is no obstruction.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
with the radar signals. automatically reactivate a short time after
the weather conditions improve.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should
of the road may interfere with the radar
automatically reactivate a short time after
signals.
the weather conditions improve.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end
radar checked for proper coverage and
impact.
operation.
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way. of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is Wait a short time. It may take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display. is no obstruction.
Note: Proper system operation requires a Note: If something hits the front end of your
clear view of the road by the camera. Have vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
any windshield damage in the area of the zone may change. This could cause missed
camera's field of view repaired. or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
182
Driving Aids
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat

at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. When operational
conditions are correct, the message
deactivates. For example, when the ambient
temperature around the sensor decreases
or the sensor automatically recalibrates
successfully.
183
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: The center of the payload should be

located within the wheelbase of the vehicle.
WARNINGS Note: Avoid one sided load distribution.
Use load securing straps to an Note: Uneven load distribution could result
approved standard, e.g. DIN. in unacceptable handling and braking
Make sure that you secure all loose characteristics.
items properly.
Place luggage and other loads as low ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
and as far forward as possible within CARRIERS (If Equipped)
the luggage or loadspace.
Do not exceed the maximum front Load Carrying - Roof Loads
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. Note: Vehicles fitted with plastic roof rails
Do not exceed the maximum gross must not be fitted with roof racks or load
vehicle weight. See Vehicle carriers that are mounted off the roof rail.
Identification Plate (page 264).
Do not place solid objects outside
the loadspace area for example
timber and sheet material.
Drive Type 17" Wheel 18"Wheel 20"Wheel With Moonroof -

All Wheel Sizes
Four-Wheel 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 80 kg

Drive
Rear Wheel 100 kg 100 kg 60 kg 30 kg
Drive
Note: When using the roof rack, make sure Note: For cargo carrying purposes, the roof
that the total load carried by the roof rails rails must be used together with the with
does not exceed the loads listed in the the roof rack/bars. The roof rails must never
previous table. Overloading or incorrectly be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, it
distributing the load may cause damage to may result in damage to the roof, paint or
the vehicle. possible loss of cargo.
Note: It is recommended to position the Note: When carrying luggage on the roof
front roof rack/bar in line with the center rack, ensure that the gross vehicle mass
pillar, between the front and rear doors. rating (GVMR) and gross axle weight rating
Position the rear roof rack/bar at least (GAWR) are not exceeded.
700mm rearward of the front roof rack/bar.
Evenly distribute the cargo load to the roof
rack mounting points, both fore/aft and
across the vehicle.
184
Load Carrying
Note: If you must carry a load on the roof

rack of the vehicle, use extra caution when
driving and make sure the loads secured.
Remember that the vehicle's center of
gravity is altered by the mass of the load on
the roof, thus affecting the driving
characteristics. Drive carefully, avoid rapid
starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops, also,
crosswind effects are increased.
185
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER When towing a trailer:

• Obey country specific regulations for
WARNINGS towing a trailer.
Do not exceed 100 km/h. Failure to • Do not exceed 100 km/h even if a
follow this instruction could result in country allows higher speeds under
the loss of control of your vehicle, certain conditions.
personal injury or death. • Place loads as low as possible and
Do not exceed the maximum gross central to the axle of your trailer. For
combination mass stated on the best stability of the trailer in an unladen
vehicle identification plate. Failure vehicle, place the load in the trailer
to follow this instruction could result in towards the nose within the maximum
personal injury. nose load as this gives the best
stability. See Recommended Towing
Do not exceed the maximum vertical Weights (page 186).
load on the tow ball. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the • Reduce the stipulated maximum
loss of control of your vehicle, personal permitted gross combination mass by
injury or death. 10% for every additional 1,000 m in
high altitude regions above 1,000 m.
Do not tow a trailer unless your
vehicle is fitted with a compatible • Use a low gear when descending a
aftermarket electronic trailer brake steep downhill slope.
controller. Failure to follow this instruction The stability of your vehicle to trailer
could result in the loss of control of your combination is very much dependent on
vehicle, personal injury or death. For the quality of the trailer.
additional information and assistance, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer. RECOMMENDED TOWING
Do not exceed the maximum front
WEIGHTS
and rear axle loads for your vehicle.
WARNINGS
The anti-lock brake system does not Towing trailers beyond the maximum
control the trailer brakes. recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle and
Note: Vehicles with the electronic stability could result in engine damage,
program have trailer stability control transmission damage, structural damage,
included. loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the
trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
186
Towing
Towing Capacities
Gross
Max Tow With
Variant Transmission Drive FDR Combination
Trailer Brake
Mass
10-Speed Auto- 2WD 3.31 5,700 kg 3,000 kg

2.0L TDCi matic Transmission
Diesel (132 4WD 3.31 5,800 kg 3,000 kg
kW / 180 2WD 3.31 5,200 kg 2,500 kg
PS) 6-Speed Manual
Transmission 4WD 3.31 5,200 kg 2,500 kg
2.0L TDCi 2WD 3.31 5,900 kg 3,100 kg
Bi-Turbo
10-Speed Auto-
Diesel (156
matic Transmission 4WD 3.31 5,900 kg 3,100 kg
kW / 213
PS)
6-Speed Manual 2WD 3.55 5,700 kg 3,000 kg

2.2L TDCi
Diesel (118 Transmission 4WD 3.55 5,800 kg 3,000 kg
kW / 160
PS) 6-Speed Automatic
2WD 3.73 5,700 kg 3,000 kg
Transmission
3.2L TDCi 2WD 3.73 5,700 kg 3,000 kg
Diesel (147 6-Speed Automatic
kW / 200 Transmission 4WD 3.73 5,800 kg 3,000 kg
PS)
Trailer Nose Weight

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum vertical load on the tow ball. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death.
Variant Minimum Nose Weight Maximum Nose Weight
All 7% of the towed weight 300 kg
187
Towing
TOW BALL 2. Insert the hitch pin.

3. Secure the hitch pin in place with the
WARNINGS R-clip.
Always place the tow ball arm in a
secure location in your vehicle so it Driving with a trailer
does not become a projectile in a Note: If any of the below conditions cannot
crash. Failure to follow this instruction be met, do not use the tow bar and have it
could result in personal injury or death. checked by an authorized dealer.
Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the Note: Never unlock the tow ball arm with
trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer the trailer attached.
hitch could reduce the hitch rating.
Before starting your journey
Note: When not in use, remove the tow ball • Depending on the tow ball assembly
assembly from the vehicle. (Type 1, 2 or 3) confirm that it is
correctly engaged and locked in place.
Note: Take special care when fitting the
• Install the plug into its seat.
tow ball assembly as the safety of the
vehicle and the trailer depends on this. Note: Tow coupling anti-rattle pinch bolt
(if equipped) should be removed from the
Note: Do not modify the trailer coupling.
towbar when towing. When not towing, the
Note: Do not disassemble, repair or modify anti-rattle pinch bolt should be replaced,
the tow ball assembly. and lock nut tightened. Tightening torque
must not exceed 47 Nm.
Tow Ball Hitch Assembly
Anti-rattle pinch bolt removal
2
1 1
2
E266388 E208167
1. Insert the tow ball assembly into the

hitch box.
188
Towing
Remove the tow coupling anti-rattle pinch Drive off slowly and smoothly without
bolt (1) by loosening the pinch bolt lock jerking the vehicle you are towing.
nut (2).
Vehicles With Automatic
Driving without a trailer Transmission
1. Remove the tow ball assembly from WARNINGS
the vehicle. If a speed of 20 km/h and a distance
Maintenance of 20 km is to be exceeded the drive
wheels must be lifted clear of the
Keep the system clean. ground.
Periodically lubricate the tow ball It is recommended not to tow with
mechanism with resin-free grease or oil. the drive wheels on the ground.
However, if it is required to move your
Lubricate any tow ball assembly locking vehicle from a dangerous location, do not
mechanisms with graphite. tow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h or
further than 20 km.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON Do not tow your vehicle backward.
FOUR WHEELS
In the event of a mechanical failure
All Vehicles of the transmission the drive wheels
WARNINGS must be lifted clear of the ground.
Switch the ignition on when towing Do not tow your vehicle if the
the vehicle. ambient temperature is below 0°C.
The brake and steering assistance
will not operate unless the engine is
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distances
and heavier steering.
Too much tension in the tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on the
front towing eye.
When towing a 2WD vehicle you
must select neutral.
Do not tow the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground while in AWD
mode. Tow your vehicle with all
wheels off the ground or all wheels on the
ground while the vehicle is in 2WD mode
in an event of a breakdown or mechanical
failure of the transmission.
189
Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN You must only drive your vehicle for a short

distance if the engine overheats. The
Tires distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
New tires need to be run-in for terrain. The engine continues to operate
approximately 500 km. During this time, with limited power for a short period of
you may experience different driving time.
characteristics. If the engine temperature continues to rise,
Brakes and Clutch the fuel supply to the engine reduces. The
air conditioning switches off and the engine
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch cooling fan operates continually.
if possible for the first 150 km in town and 1. Gradually reduce your speed and stop
for the first 1,500 km on freeways. your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Engine
2. Immediately switch the engine off to
Avoid driving too fast during the first prevent severe engine damage.
1,500 km. Vary your speed frequently and
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
change up through the gears early. Do not
labor the engine. 4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 225).
Vehicles With a Diesel Engine 5. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
During the first 3,000 km, you may notice possible.
a ticking sound when your vehicle slows
down. This is due to adjustments of your OFF-ROAD DRIVING
new diesel engine and is normal.
Note: Off-road driving can be extremely
REDUCED ENGINE dangerous and carries inherent risks that
may not be preventable even with the best
PERFORMANCE precautions. Ford strongly recommends
driving within your ability and taking every
WARNING safety precaution.
If you continue to drive your vehicle In addition to providing an excellent
when the engine is overheating, the on-road driving experience, your vehicle
engine could stop without warning. also excels at all types of off-road driving.
Failure to follow this instruction could The vehicle has been designed and
result in the loss of control of your vehicle. equipped to allow you to explore those
places where the road doesn’t take you,
If the engine coolant temperature gauge whether it’s a forest trail or the open
needle moves to the upper limit position, desert. Before going off road driving,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges consult with your local governmental
(page 69). agencies to determine designated off-road
trails and recreation areas. Also, be sure to
understand any off-road vehicle
registration requirements for the area in
which you plan on driving.
190
Driving Hints
Before taking your vehicle off-road driving,

a basic vehicle inspection should be done
to make sure that the vehicle is in top
working condition.
It is always recommended that at least C D
two vehicles are used while off road
driving. Using two vehicles in "buddy"
system helps make sure that help is close
at hand should a vehicle become stuck or
B
damaged. It is also wise to take supplies
such as a first aid kit, a supply of water, a
tow strap and a cell or satellite phone with A
you any time an off-road excursion is
planned.
Terrain Management System

(TMS) (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Terrain E206127
Management System that allows the driver
to enhance the off-road performance of A Normal mode - This mode is for
the vehicle, by selecting the mode best on-road conditions and should
suited to the terrain and driving conditions. be used on surfaces which are
Each mode changes a number of the similar to hard road surfaces, or
vehicle parameters within the engine, once the need for any of the
transmission, traction control and off-road modes has passed.
Four-Wheel Drive systems.
B Snow/Mud/Grass – This mode
should be used where a firm
surface is covered with loose or
slippery material. This includes
gravel, shallow mud, wet grass
or snow covered road.
C Sand - This mode should be
used for crossing deep sand or
deep sticky mud.
D Rock - This mode gives low
speed controllability for crawling
over rocks. Low range must be
selected before this mode is
activated. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 136).
191
Driving Hints
High and Low Range Usage Basic Off-road Driving Techniques

• Grip the steering wheel with your
Normal Snow/ Sand Rock
thumbs on the outside of the rim. This
Mud/
will reduce the risk of injury due to
Grass
abrupt steering wheel motions that
High Yes Yes Yes No occur when negotiating rough terrain.
Range Do not grip the steering wheel with your
(H) thumbs inside the rim.
• Throttle, brake and steering inputs
Low Yes - - Yes should be made in a smooth and
Range controlled manner. Sudden inputs to
(L) the controls can cause loss of traction
or upset the vehicle, especially while
Low range can be selected by pressing the on sloped terrain or while crossing
4X4 LOW switch in the centre console. obstacles such as rocks or logs.
Note: If an entry condition for any mode is • Look ahead on your route noting
not met, the information display screen will upcoming obstacles, surface texture
display the appropriate messages to guide or color changes or any other factors
the driver through the proper operating which may indicate a change in
procedures. available traction, and adjust the
vehicle speed and route accordingly.
Note: Operating the vehicle in any of the
During pre-run, mark obstacles with
off-road modes does not guarantee that
GPS markers to make sure appropriate
the vehicle will not become stuck in sand,
speeds are used to avoid potential
snow or mud or other debris. It is the driver’s
vehicle damage.
responsibility to assess off-road situations
and determine if the terrain is passable. • When driving off-road, if the front or
rear suspension is bottoming-out
Off-Road Driving Aids and/or excessive contact with the
skid-plates is encountered, reduce
• ELD (electronic locking differential) vehicle speed to avoid potential
See Electronic Locking Differential damage to the vehicle.
(page 137).
• When running with other vehicles, it is
Note: The locking and unlocking speeds recommended that communication is
may be different in different TMS modes. used and the lead vehicle notify other
• HDC (hill descent control) See Using vehicles of obstacles that could cause
Hill Descent Control (page 144). potential vehicle damage.
• Always keep available ground
Off-road Screen clearance in mind and pick a route that
minimizes the risk of catching the
The real-time status of your vehicles underside of the vehicle on an obstacle.
off-road systems can be continuously
monitored using the first off-road screen
found in the information displays screen.
For more information, See General
192
Driving Hints
• When negotiating low speed obstacles, Driving in Sand

applying light brake pressure in
conjunction with the throttle will help WARNING
prevent the vehicle from jerking and Always re-inflate tires to
will allow you to negotiate the obstacle recommended tire pressures before
in a more controlled manner. Using 4x4 the vehicle is operated on-road. The
Low will also help with this. recommended pressure is located on the
• Use and equip your vehicle with tire label or safety certification label,
supplemental safety equipment as located on the B-pillar, inside the driver's
discussed later in this chapter. door.
• Please consult your local off-road
group for other helpful tips. Soft sand and dunes present a very unique
• off road driving requires a high degree driving challenge. Before going on such a
of concentration. Even if your local law drive, some research is advised regarding
does not prohibit alcohol use while proven techniques and pitfalls inherent in
driving off-road, Ford strongly driving in deep sand.
recommends against drinking if you Some general points to consider:
plan to off-road.
• It is very difficult and in many cases
Driving in Mud impossible to navigate deep sand with
tire pressures which are appropriate for
• Deep mud should be approached with on-road driving. If you decide to air
caution especially if you are driving in down your tires, be advised that the tire
an unfamiliar area. pressure monitoring light will
• If possible, test the depth of a mud hole illuminate. The tires must be returned
before entering with the vehicle. to normal recommended tire pressures
before driving on pavement or hard
• Keep in mind that obstacles and deep surfaces.
ruts may be hidden beneath the
surface of the mud. • Lower tire pressures are more likely to
cause a de-beading of the tire during
• Proceed in a steady, controlled manner cornering. Avoid sharp or abrupt turns
through deep mud while maintaining when you have extremely low tire
momentum. pressures.
• If momentum is lost and you feel the • To help prevent becoming stuck in
vehicle becoming stuck, turning the deep sand, avoid spinning the tires or
steering wheel back and forth (sawing making abrupt maneuvers. Proceed in
the wheel) a quarter turn in each a controlled manner while maintaining
direction may give the vehicle the vehicle momentum.
traction needed to clear the muddy
area. • Avoid stopping or parking on inclines
as this makes it more difficult to
• In higher speed areas with shallow resume driving while in sand.
mud, directional control will be reduced
in the muddy area much like on snow
or ice. When approaching such an area,
be sure to slow to a speed which
allows you to maneuver as required by
the conditions.
193
Driving Hints
Driving in Deep Snow • Always attempt to climb a steep hill

along the fall line of the slope and not
• Maintain vehicle momentum. diagonally.
• Apply the throttle very gently to avoid • If the vehicle is unable to make it up
spinning the tires. Spinning the tires will the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back
potentially dig the vehicle deeper into down the slope. Place the vehicle in
the snow. low range and slowly back down in
• Drive in a controlled manner, avoiding reverse.
aggressive steering wheel movements, • When descending a steep slope, select
and keep braking to a minimum. low gear and engage hill descent
• Extremely deep snow may cause the control. Use the throttle and brake
undercarriage of the vehicle to become pedals to control your descent speed
stuck. Test the depth of the snow as described earlier in this section using
before trying to drive through or over it. hill descent control. Note that hill
descent control is functional in reverse
Crossing Obstacles and should be used in this situation.
• Review the path ahead before Water Wading
attempting to cross any obstacle. It is
best if the obstacle is reviewed from See Driving Through Water (page 195).
outside the vehicle so that there is a
good understanding of terrain condition After Off-Road Driving
both in, front of, and behind the
It is important to complete a full vehicle
obstacle.
inspection after off-road driving. Some
• Approach obstacles slowly and slowly items to check include:
inch the vehicle over.
• Make sure that tires are inflated to
• If a large obstacle such as a rock proper tire pressure as indicated on the
cannot be avoided, choose a path that tire placard.
places the rock directly under the tire
• Check the wheels and undercarriage
rather than the undercarriage of the
for built up mud or debris which can
vehicle. This will help prevent damage
cause vehicle vibration.
to the vehicle.
• Make sure that the grille and radiator
• Ditches and washouts should be
are clear of any obstructions that may
crossed at a 45-degree angle, allowing
affect cooling.
each wheel to independently cross the
obstacle. • Make sure that the brakes are in proper
working order and are free of any mud,
Hill Climbing stones and debris, which can become
trapped around the brake rotor,
WARNING backing plate and caliper.
Extreme care should be used when • Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
steering the vehicle in reverse down • Inspect for torn or punctured boots on
a slope so as not to cause the vehicle ball joints, half shafts and steering
to swerve out of control. gears.
• Inspect the exhaust system for damage
or looseness.
194
Driving Hints
• Inspect the undercarriage fasteners. If

any are loose or damaged, tighten or
replace ensuring that the proper torque
specification is used.
• Inspect the tires for any cuts in the
tread or sidewall area. Also inspect the Y
sidewall for any bulge indicating
damage to the tire.
• Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks,
or other damage.
E137139
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS Y 800mm (31.5 inches)
The functional operation of some When driving in water, maintain a low
components and systems can be affected speed and do not stop your vehicle. After
at temperatures below -25°C. driving through water and as soon as it is
safe to do so:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER • Depress the brake pedal lightly to
check that the brakes are functioning
WARNINGS correctly.
Drive through water in an emergency • Check that the horn works.
only and not as part of normal • Check that your vehicle's lamps are
driving. fully operational.
Engine damage can occur if water • Check the power assistance of the
enters the air filter. steering system.
In an emergency, you can drive your vehicle FLOOR MATS

through water to a maximum depth as
shown and at a maximum speed of 7 km/h.
WARNINGS
You must take extra care when driving
through flowing water. Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
injury or death.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
195
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor

mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
196
HAZARD FLASHERS WARNING TRIANGLE (If Equipped)

Note: The hazard flashers operate when Space is provided in the luggage
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is compartment.
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to FUEL SHUTOFF
restart your vehicle.
WARNING
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your If your vehicle has been involved in a
hazard flashers when your crash, have the fuel system checked.
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other Failure to follow this instruction
motorists. could result in fire, personal injury or death.
• Press the flasher control and all front

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
and rear direction indicators flash.
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
• Press the button again to switch them that various systems are safe to restart.
off. Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
FIRE EXTINGUISHER (If Equipped) restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
Note: Make sure you regularly check the not restart after your third attempt, contact
expiration date on the fire extinguisher. a qualified technician.
The fire extinguisher is in front of the The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
passenger's seat. If you want to use the fuel to the engine in the event of a
fire extinguisher, you must monthly inspect moderate to severe crash. Not every
it visually to make sure its gauge and impact causes a shutoff.
structure are not damaged, the trigger is Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
in good operating condition and that there you may restart your vehicle.
is no obstruction at the nozzle.
If your vehicle has a key system:
The operating instructions are on the fire
extinguisher. Maintenance of the fire 1. Switch off the ignition.
extinguisher is the responsibility of the 2. Switch to start position.
owner. Therefore, the owner should carry 3. Switch off the ignition.
out the maintenance according to the
manufacturer instructions printed on the 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
equipment. fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
Before you use the fire extinguisher, make
steps 1 through 4.
sure you remove the transparent plastic
packaging used for the transportation of
the fire extinguisher to prevent obstruction.
When replacing, make sure the new fire
extinguisher is of type dry powder ABC.
197
If your vehicle has a push button start Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
system: with an automatic transmission may cause
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your transmission damage.
vehicle. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
2. Press the brake pedal and vehicle.
START/STOP to switch on your Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
vehicle. disabled vehicle as this could damage the
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal vehicle electrical system.
and press START/STOP to switch off Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
your vehicle. of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle two vehicles do not touch.
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP Connecting the Jumper Cables
without pressing the brake pedal.
WARNINGS
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4. Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
WARNINGS Do not use fuel lines, engine valve
Batteries normally produce explosive covers, windshield wiper arms, the
gases which can cause personal intake manifold, or hood latch as
injury. Therefore, do not allow ground points.
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Preparing Your Vehicle

Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
198
3 4
2 E205764
Note: You can use the optional connection

point location shown above to ground your
vehicle.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
E142664
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
represents the booster vehicle. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
to the positive (+) terminal of the started, run both vehicle engines for an
discharged battery. additional three minutes before
2. Connect the other end of the positive disconnecting the jumper cables.
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery. Removing the Jumper Cables
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
negative (-) terminal of the booster order that they were connected.
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
199
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicators
4 and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
1 • Your vehicle runs out of power.
2
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable

from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
E143886
200
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a TOWING POINTS

professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by
any other means, vehicle damage may
occur.
A
We produce a towing manual for all
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle. B
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or E203454
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.

A Front towing eye.
*
B Rear towing eye.
* Remove the cover to access the towing
eye.
E221577
Use the towing eye cover removal tool

(provided in the vehicle tool kit) to
carefully remove the towing eye cover by
pulling rearward.
201
Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Pre-Fuse Box
Fuse Box Locations
A E
E206156
B C D Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in

E206155
the engine compartment attached to the
positive battery post. This box contains
A Pre-fuse box. several high current fuses. If replacement
B Engine compartment fuse box of these high current fuses is required, see
(Power Distribution Box - PDB). an authorized dealer.
C High current fuse box (below the Engine Compartment Fuse Box
PDB). (Power Distribution Box - PDB)
D Passenger compartment fuse
*
box.
E Passenger compartment fuse
**
box.
*
- Left hand drive.
**
- Right hand drive.
E206157
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
202
Fuses
The engine compartment fuse box has Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 228).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
High Current Fuse Box
E206167
The fuse box is located behind the access

cover on the outboard side of the steering
column.
E206158
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

the engine compartment below the engine
compartment fuse box. This box contains
several high current fuses. If replacement
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
of these high current fuses is required, see WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
203
Fuses
The engine compartment fuse box has reconnect the battery, you will need to
high-current fuses that protect your reset some features. See Changing the
vehicle's main electrical systems from 12V Battery (page 228). Lift the release
overloads. When you disconnect and levers at the rear of the cover to remove it.
E190797
Fuse or Relay Fuse Rating Protected Component

Number
1 1 Rear wiper.
15A
2 - Starter motor solenoid relay.
3 2 Rain sensor.
5A
4 - Front blower motor relay.
5 1 Auxiliary power point 3 - console rear.
20A
6 - High-intensity discharge headlamp low beam relay.
204
Fuses

Number
7 2 Powertrain control module.

20A
8 2 EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) cooler bypass control
20A
- vacuum solenoid valve (2.0L).
EGR cooler bypass (2.2L, 3.2L).
Temperature mass air flow (2.2L, 3.2L).
Volumetric control valve (3.2L).
9 - Powertrain control module relay.

10 1 Auxiliary power point 1 - instrument panel.
20A
11 3 Glow plug module (2.0L).
15A
Not used (spare) (2.2L, 3.2L).
12 3 Turbo bypass valve actuator (2.0L).
15A
Wastegate actuator (2.0L).
A/C compressor and control valve (2.0L).
Coolant pump (2.0L).
Fan drive.
Glow plug module (2.2L, 3.2L).
13 3 Not used (spare).
15A
15A
15 - Run/start relay.
16 1 Auxiliary power point 2 - instrument panel.
20A
17 1 Auxiliary power point 4 - third row power point.
20A
18 2 Fuel pump relay coil (2.2L, 3.2L).
10A
19 2 Electric power assisted steering.
10A
20 2 Headlamp switch.
10A
Headlamp leveling motor.
Headlamp control module.
21 2 Transmission control module.
15A
22 2 Air conditioning compressor.
10A
205
Fuses

Number
23 2 Parking aid rear view camera.

7.5A
Blind spot monitoring module - left and right.
Adaptive speed control radar.
Head up display.
IPMA (image processing module A).
Terrain management switch.
24 - Not used.
25 3 Anti-lock brake system.
10A
10A
27 - Not used.
28 2 Powertrain control module.
10A
29 2 Rear window washer pump.
10A
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
32 - Water-in-fuel filter heater relay (2.0L).
- Not used. (2.2L, 3.2L).
33 - Air conditioning clutch relay.
34 2 Steering column lock.
20A
35 2 Transmission control module.
15A
36 - Not used.
37 2 Heated exterior mirror.
10A
38 - Not used.
39 - Not used.
40 - Fuel pump relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Third row seat power fold relay.
206
Fuses

Number
43 - Not used.
44 - Not used.
45 - Not used.
10A
47 3 Brake pedal switch.
10A
48 2 Horn.
20A
49 2 Water-in-fuel filter heater relay coil feed (2.0L).
5A
Not used (spare) (2.2L, 3.2L).
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 - Not used.
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Rear blower motor relay.
1 M-type fuse.
2 Micro fuse.
3 Dual micro fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom

There are fuses on the bottom of the fuse
box. To access the bottom of the fuse box,
do the following:
207
Fuses
A 2 3
1 5
E206171 E206174
3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side

A Towards the front side of the
of the engine compartment and rotate
vehicle.
as shown in the graphics.
1. Release the two latches, on both sides 4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
of the fuse box. access the bottom side.
2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from 5. Release the two latches to open the
the cradle. fuse cover.
208
Fuses
E190798
Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
56 1 Fuel pump control module.

30A
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 - Not used.
60 2 Water-in-fuel filter heater
40A
(2.0L).
- Not used. (2.2L, 3.2L).
61 - Not used.
62 2 Body control module 1 -
50A
lighting.
63 - Not used.
209
Fuses
64 1 Trailer tow connector.

20A
65 1 Heated front seats.
20A
66 - Not used.
67 2 Body control module 2 -
50A
lighting.
68 1 Rear window defroster.
40A
69 1 Anti-lock brake system
30A
valves.
70 1 Passenger power seat.
20A
71 - Not used.
72 1 Third row power fold seat.
30A
73 1 Trailer module.
30A
74 1 Driver power seat.
20A
75 1 Rear blower motor.
25A
76 1 High-intensity discharge low
20A
beam headlamps - left-
hand.
77 1 4WD (four-wheel drive)
25A
module.
78 1 4WD module.
30A
79 2 Blower motor.
40A
80 2 High-intensity discharge low
20A
beam headlamps - right-
hand.
81 1 Inverter.
40A
82 2 Anti-lock brake system
60A
pump.
210
Fuses
83 1 Windshield wiper motor.

30A
84 1 Starter motor solenoid.
30A
85 1 Power liftgate module.
30A
87 2 Trailer module.
40A
1 M-type fuse.
2 LPJ-type fuse.
Battery Mounted Fuse Link
E206156
Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
225A Alternator. (2.2L, 3.2L).

1
300A Alternator. (2.0L).
2 125A Electronic power assist steering.
211
Fuses
High Current Fuse Box
E206158
Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Component
1 70A Glow plug module.

2 125A Body control module.
3 50A Body control module.
4 - Busbar through to power distribution box.
5 100A PTC (positive temperature coefficient) heater.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

The fuse box is below and outboard of the
steering column behind the access cover.
212
Fuses
E145984

Number
1 - Not used.

7.5A
Driver door latch.
3 20A
1
Fuel flap unlock relay.

5A
5 1 Subwoofer amplifier.
20A

10A

10A
8 2 Security horn.
10A

10A
Power liftgate module.
10 5A
2
Liftgate hands-free entry.
11 2 Interior motion sensor.

5A
213
Fuses

Number
Electronic control panel.

12 7.5A
2
Climate control module
Rear auxiliary module.
Instrument cluster.
13 7.5A
2
Steering column control module.
Data link connector.

10A
Gateway module.
15 10A
2
Data link connector.
OBD (on-board diagnostic) II

15A
17 2 Battery backed sounder.

5A
Ignition switch.
18 5A
2
Push button start.

7.5A

7.5A
Humidity and in car temperature sensor.
21 5A
2
PTC heater.

5A
Inverter.
Door lock switch.
23 10A
1
Moonroof.
Driver door window switch (one-touch up/down all
doors).
24 1 Central locking system.

20A
Driver door control module (power window - one-
touch up/down all doors)
25 30A
1
Driver door power window switch memory (one-
touch up/down driver only)
Passenger door control module (power window -
26 30A
1
one touch up/down)
214
Fuses

Number
27 1 Moonroof.
30A

20A
Left rear door control module (power window - one
29 30A
1
touch up/down).
Right rear door control module (power window - one
30 30A
1
touch up/down).

15A
Radio transceiver module.
SYNC.
32 10A
1
Global positioning system module.
Multi-function display.
Door entry remote.
33 1 Audio unit.
20A
34 1 Run / start relay.

30A
35 1 Restraints control module.

5A
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
36 15A
1
Mirror adjustment control.
37 1 Transfer case control module.

20A
38 3 Power windows (one-touch up/down - driver only).

30A
1 Microfuse.
2 Dual micro fuse.
3 PTC fuse.
215
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
E217331
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire. If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Fuse Types
E207206
Callout Fuse Type
A Micro 2
B Micro 3
C Maxi
D Mini
216
Fuses
Callout Fuse Type
E M Case
F J Case
G J Case Low Profile
217
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION • Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid

Check (page 226).
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help • Tire pressures (when cold). See
maintain its roadworthiness and resale Technical Specifications (page 256).
value. There is a large network of Ford • Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
authorized repairers that are there to help (page 242).
you with their professional servicing
expertise. Authorized repairers are best Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level
qualified to service your vehicle properly ground.
and expertly, with a wide range of highly
specialized tools. Monthly Checks
In addition to regular servicing, we • Engine coolant level (engine cold). See
recommend that you carry out the Engine Coolant Check (page 225).
following checks. • Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
WARNINGS • Air conditioning operation.
Switch the ignition off before • Parking brake operation.
touching or attempting adjustment • Horn operation.
of any kind.
• Tightness of lug nuts. See Technical
Do not touch the electronic ignition Specifications (page 256).
system parts after you have switched
the ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at high OPENING AND CLOSING THE
voltage. HOOD
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan. Under Opening the Hood
certain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes after
you have switched the engine off.
Make sure that you fit filler caps
securely after carrying out
maintenance checks.
Daily Checks
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling

• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 224).
• Brake fluid level. See Brake and 1
E206129
Clutch Fluid Check (page 226).
218
Maintenance
1. Pull the hood release lever. See

Instrument Panel Overview (page
12).
E201861
5. The hood strut supports the hood.
E258275 Closing the Hood

2. Slightly lift the hood. 1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight.
3. Move the catch to the left for vehicles
with left-hand drive. Move the catch to 2. If necessary, apply a downward force
the right for vehicle with right-hand on the leading edge of the hood prior
drive. to engage with the latch, to fully latch
the hood.
4. Open the hood.
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156

KW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM)
219
Maintenance
E266111
A Engine coolant reservoir. See E Fuel filter water trap. See

Engine Coolant Check (page Draining the Fuel Filter Water
225). Trap (page 227).
B Air filter. See Changing the F Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Engine Air Filter (page 236). and Clutch Fluid Check (page
226).
C Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 224). G Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 202).
D Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 224). H Battery connection. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 198).
I Windshield washer fluid. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 226).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DIESEL
220
Maintenance
Right Hand Drive
A B C D E
I H G F
E200847
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. E Engine compartment fuse box.

See Engine Coolant Check See Fuses (page 202).
(page 225). F Battery. See Maintenance
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (page 218).
cap. See Brake and Clutch G Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Fluid Check (page 226). Oil Check (page 224).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine H Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
Oil Dipstick (page 224). Washer Fluid Check (page 226).
D Fuel filter water drain. See I Air Cleaner.
Draining the Fuel Filter Water
Trap (page 227).
221
Maintenance
Left Hand Drive
A C D B E
I H G F
E200869
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. E Engine compartment fuse box.

See Engine Coolant Check See Fuses (page 202).
(page 225). F Battery. See Maintenance
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (page 218).
cap. See Brake and Clutch G Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Fluid Check (page 226). Oil Check (page 224).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine H Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
Oil Dipstick (page 224). Washer Fluid Check (page 226).
D Fuel filter water drain. See I Air Cleaner.
Trap (page 227).
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L DIESEL
222
Maintenance
E269569
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. H Battery. See Maintenance

See Engine Coolant Check (page 218).
(page 225). I Washer fluid reservoir cap. See
B Air cleaner. See Changing the Washer Fluid Check (page 226).
Engine Air Filter (page 236).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 224).
D Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 224).
E Fuel filter water trap. See
Trap (page 227).
F Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
cap. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 226).
G Engine junction box. See Fuses
(page 202).
223
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156 dipstick and remove it again to check
KW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI the oil level.
DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM) If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 265).
A B
Note: Check the oil level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
E226469 engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they may damage the engine.
A Minimum.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
B Maximum. reaches its normal level after approximately
5,000 km.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.2L Adding Oil

DIESEL/3.2L DIESEL WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
A B If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down. Failure
to take care may result in personal injury.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running. Failure to take
care may result in personal injury.
E71362
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.
A MIN See Capacities and Specifications
(page 265).
B MAX
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
ENGINE OIL CHECK Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level maximum mark may cause engine damage.
ground.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10 absorbent cloth immediately.
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
224
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Note: Do not use Stop Leak Pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
WARNINGS
heating systems.
Do not dispose of engine coolant in
the household refuse or the public Adding Engine Coolant
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility. WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the Do not remove the coolant reservoir
windshield washer fluid container. If cap while the engine is running or hot.
sprayed on the windshield, engine
Only add coolant when the engine is
coolant could make it difficult to see
cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10
through the windshield.
minutes for the engine to cool down.
Do not allow the coolant to touch
your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately
with plenty of water and contact your
physician.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.
Do not mix different colors or types
of coolant in your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company does not recommend

the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
E206128
Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze
Make sure that the coolant level is and water or prediluted engine coolant that
between the MIN and MAX marks on the meets the correct specification.
coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is at Note: Use coolants which meet the
or below the minimum mark, add coolant specifications or requirements defined. Use
immediately. of other coolants may lead to damage
Maintain coolant concentration within which is not covered by your vehicle's
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze Warranty. See Capacities and
point between -29°C and -34°C. Specifications (page 258).
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level To top up the coolant level do the
ground. following:
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The 1. Unscrew the cap SLOWLY. Any
level may expand beyond the MAX mark. pressure will escape as you unscrew
the cap.
2. Add engine coolant to the MAX mark,
do not overfill.
225
Maintenance
3. Refit filler cap. Turn it clockwise until Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
you feel a strong click. lines are within the normal operating range;
Note: In case of emergency, you can add there is no need to add fluid.
water without engine coolant in order to If the fluid levels are outside of the normal
reach a vehicle service location. operating range, the performance of the
Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution system could be compromised; seek
of engine coolant can cause engine damage, service from you authorized dealer
such as corrosion, overheating or freezing. immediately.
Note: The cooling system filler cap should Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
be inspected and cleaned regularly. The cap specification. See Capacities and
should be replaced if there is any evidence Specifications (page 265).
of deterioration of the sealing.
POWER STEERING FLUID
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
WARNINGS fluid reservoir to check or fill.
Use of any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid may
reduce brake efficiency and not meet WASHER FLUID CHECK
Ford's performance standards.
When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
Do not allow the fluid to touch your fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the cold weather and improve the cleaning
affected areas immediately with capability. For information on fluid dilution,
plenty of water and contact your doctor. refer to the product instructions. We
Clean the filler cap before removing. recommend that you only use high quality
Use only fluid that meets Ford washer fluid.
specifications and from a sealed Note: The reservoir supplies the front and
container. rear washer systems.
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.

Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are
supplied from the same reservoir.
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
The fluid level will drop slowly as the
brakes wear, and will rise when the brake
components are replaced.
226
Maintenance
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER For item location: See Under Hood
Overview (page 219).
WATER TRAP - 2.0L TDCI BI-
1. Switch the ignition off.
TURBO DIESEL (156 KW/213
2. Remove quick connector from water
PS) (YN) /2.0L TDCI DIESEL drain spigot.
(132 KW/180 PS) (YM), 2.0L 3. Attach a tube to the drain spigot and
DIESEL place the end of the tube into a
suitable container.
WARNING 4. Switch the ignition on for 4 x 20
Do not dispose of fuel in the seconds, to activate in-tank pump.
household refuse or the public 5. Allow the water to drain.
6. Switch the ignition off.
waste disposal facility.
7. Remove the tube from the drain plug.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford 8. Attach quick connector back on the
specification. See Fuel Quality (page 126). drain spigot.
Note: The in-tank pump turns off after 9. Start the engine.
approximately 20 seconds. 10. Check for leaks.
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp
goes out after a few seconds, with the
engine running.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER

WATER TRAP - 2.2L DIESEL/
3.2L DIESEL
WARNING
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
waste disposal facility.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford

specification. See Fuel Quality (page 126).
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
automatically after approximately 40
seconds.
E269184
227
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

A WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
E208053
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
A Front of Vehicle. could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
For item location: See Under Hood damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
Overview (page 220). battery with a battery carrier or with your
1. Switch the ignition off. hands on opposite corners.
2. Attach a tube to the drain plug and Keep batteries out of reach of
place the end of the tube into a children. Batteries contain sulfuric
suitable container. acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
3. Loosen the drain plug approximately near the battery to protect against possible
1.5 turns. splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
4. Switch the ignition on to activate the contact with skin or eyes, flush
in-tank pump. immediately with water for a minimum of
5. Allow the water to drain. 15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
6. Switch the ignition off. physician immediately.
7. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a Battery posts, terminals and related
strong resistance. accessories contain lead and lead
8. Remove the tube from the drain plug. compounds. Wash hands after
9. Start the engine. handling.
10. Check for leaks. For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stop
the battery requirement is different.
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will You must replace the battery with
go out after approximately 2 seconds, with one of exactly the same specification.
the engine running.
The battery is located in the engine
compartment. See Under Hood
Overview (page 219).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
battery. It does not require additional
water during service.
228
Maintenance
If your vehicle battery has a cover, make Remove and Reinstall the Battery
sure you correctly install it after cleaning
or replacing the battery. To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the 1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
battery cables tightly fastened to the ignition off.
battery terminals. If you see any corrosion 2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
on the battery or terminals, remove the example lights and radio.
cables from the terminals and clean with
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid
disconnecting the battery.
with a solution of baking soda and water.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 terminal first.
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the 5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
battery cables to maintain battery charge terminal last.
for quick starting. 6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
To maintain correct operation of the 7. Remove the battery.
battery management system, if you add 8. To install, reverse the removal
any electrical devices to your vehicle, do procedure.
not connect the ground connection directly
to the negative battery terminal. A Note: The engine management system has
connection at the negative battery terminal a power hold function and remains powered
can cause inaccurate measurements of for a period after you switch the ignition off.
the battery condition and potential This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive
incorrect system operation. tables to be stored. Disconnecting the
battery without waiting can cause damage
Note: Electrical accessories or components not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
added to your vehicle by you or an
authorized dealer, may adversely affect Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
battery performance, durability and the make sure the ignition remains switched off.
performance of other electrical systems on Note: If you only disconnect the negative
your vehicle. battery cable terminal, make sure it is
When a battery replacement is required, isolated or placed away from the battery
you must use a recommended terminal to avoid un-intended connection
replacement battery that matches the or arcing.
electrical requirements of the vehicle. Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
If you disconnect or replace the battery are fully tightened.
and your vehicle has an automatic Note: If you disconnect or replace the
transmission, transmission must relearn battery, you must reset the clock and the
its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the pre-set radio stations once the battery is
transmission may shift firmly when first reconnected.
driven. This is normal operation while the
transmission fully updates its operation to
optimum shift feel.
229
Maintenance
Battery Disposal
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998 environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES
E170913
1. Manually move the wiper arms to the

service position.
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of

the blade to check for roughness. 1
E72899
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or 2. Press and hold the locking button.
cloth.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
CHANGING THE WIPER
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
BLADES into place.
Changing the Windshield Wiper Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blades Blade
Note: The windshield wiper blades are
different in length. If you install wiper blades
of the wrong length, the wiper blades can
clash damaging the wiper system.
E175222
230
Maintenance
Note: The rear wiper arm cannot be lifted Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
up beyond 25–30°. This is to prevent into place.
damage during automatic car wash.
Note: When the rear wiper blade requires
1. Move the wiper arms to the service replacement, the whole blade assembly has
position manually. to be replaced.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
Contact an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
E206062
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
2. Tightly hold the blade assembly at the normal condensation occurs, a thin film of
top and rotate it anti-clockwise till the mist can form on the interior of the lens.
blade assembly disengages from the The thin mist eventually clears and exits
wiper arm. through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
E206063 Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service if any of the above conditions
3. Align the new blade assembly with the of unacceptable moisture are present.
wiper arm groove and clip them
together.
231
Maintenance
Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs Replacing the High Beam Headlamp

Bulb
WARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s
reach. Grasp the bulb by only its
plastic base and do not touch the glass.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps
are operated.
E205833
3 1
Note: For replacement of HID type
headlamp globes, see your authorized 1. Remove the service cap.
dealer.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it
should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol 3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
before being used. assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pull it straight
1
out.
4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
A B C
Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp
Bulb
D 1
3
E205825
E205822
Headlamp assembly: 1. Remove the service cap.

A. Front parking lamp bulb. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
B. High beam headlamp bulb/ Daytime 3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
running lamp bulb. assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pull it straight
C. Low beam headlamp bulb. out.
1
D. Direction indicator lamp bulb.
232
Maintenance
4. Release the retainer spring and remove Approach Lamp and Side Repeater
the bulb from the headlamp assembly
2
by pulling it straight out.
1
- Projector type headlamp assembly.
2
- Reflector type headlamp assembly.
Replacing the Front Parking Bulb

1. Turn the bulb assembly A
counterclockwise and remove it from B
the headlamp assembly. E133683
2. Remove the bulb by gently pulling it

A Side repeater.
straight out of the socket.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order. B Approach lamp.
Note: These lamps are not serviceable,
Replacing the Direction Indicator Lamp contact an authorized dealer if it fails.
Bulb
Front Fog Lamps
1. Turn the bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it from
the headlamp assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket
by gently pushing it into the socket and
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Side Repeater
E205847
1. Remove the screws from the splash

E133682 shield at the wheel well to gain access
to the lamp assembly.
1. Slide the lens to the rear and remove
it. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
233
Maintenance
2. Remove the tail lamp cover starting

from the outboard edge using a flat tip
screw driver.
3. Remove the two bolts from the lamp
assembly.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
and gently pull out the lamp assembly.
A B
E205849
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise E206199

C
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp A Rear turn signal.
bulb from the bulb holder. B Stop/Rear Position Lamp.
Replacing the Tail, Brake and Turn C Rear Position lamp.
Signal Lamp Bulbs
1. Remove the bulb socket from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the bulb by:
• Rear turn signal bulb - Gently
pushing it into the socket and
• Stop/Rear Position Lamp- Gently
2 pushing it into the socket and
• Rear position lamp- Gently pulling
3 the bulb from the socket.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from
the steps above.
E206198 Note: If your vehicle is fitted with LED
Stop/Rear Position Lamps these are not
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in serviceable. Take your vehicle to an
OFF position and open the liftgate. authorized dealer if they fail.
234
Maintenance
Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb Replacing the License Plate Lamp

Bulb
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the lift gate inner grab handle Type 1
cover using a standard flat tip screw
driver.
3. Remove the handle by unscrewing the 2
two screws using a standard cross tip
screw driver.
4. Remove the lift gate inner trim panel
to access the reverse lamp
3 1
5. Remove the bulb socket from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the bulb by gently pulling it E72789
from the socket. 1. Carefully release the spring clip.

Install the new bulb in reverse order. 2. Remove the lamp.
Replacing the Rear Fog Lamp Bulb 3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
3 2 1
E133687
E206200 1. Remove the screws.

1. Remove the bulb socket from the lamp 2. Remove the lamp lens.
assembly by turning it 3. Remove the bulb.
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the bulb by gently pulling it
from the socket.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from
the steps above.
235
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR 2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Take care to avoid other surrounding
FILTER components while lifting.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
WARNING
air filter housing.
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage 4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
and personal burn injuries, do not housing and cover to make sure no dirt
start your engine with the air cleaner gets in the engine and that you have a
removed and do not remove it while the good seal.
engine is running.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
When servicing the air cleaner, it is
edges between the air filter housing
important that no foreign material enter
and cover.
the air induction system. The engine and
turbocharger are susceptible to damage 6. Install the air filter housing cover.
from even small particles. 7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
Change the air filter element at the proper housing cover to the air filter housing.
intervals.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E197418
1. Release the clamps that secure the air

filter cover to the housing.
236
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Remove any exterior accessories, including

the antenna, before using an automatic
We recommend that you wash your vehicle car wash.
regularly with a sponge and lukewarm
water containing a neutral pH car Cleaning the Headlamps
shampoo. Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
• Never use strong household detergents or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
or soap, for example dish washing or chemical solvents to clean them.
laundry liquid. These products can Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
discolor and spot painted surfaces. they are dry.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct Cleaning the Chrome Trim
sunlight.
Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft Use soapy water.
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting. Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar Do not leave cleaning product on chrome
spots, road salt and industrial fallout surfaces longer than recommended.
to avoid paint surface damage. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners,
• Remove any exterior accessories, for or cleaning chemicals, may cause damage
example antennas, before entering a over a period of time.
car wash.
Underbody
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces Flush the complete underside of your
immediately. vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
Suntan lotion and insect repellent can drain holes free from packed dirt.
damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come into contact with your Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
vehicle, wash them off as soon as possible. Use only approved products to clean
plastic parts.
Using a Car Wash
Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
cycle, make sure that you remove the wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. WIPER BLADES
Note: Switch the blower motor off to Car wash chemicals and environmental
prevent contamination of the cabin air filter. fallout can result in windshield and wiper
Prior to using a car wash facility check the blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
suitability of it for your vehicle. wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
Some car wash installations use water at blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
high pressure. This could damage certain performance.
parts of your vehicle.
237
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades: To clean:

• Clean the windshield with a • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When vacuum cleaner or brush.
cleaning the interior of the windshield, • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the cloth and a mild soap and water
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
any glass cleaner off these surfaces cloth.
immediately.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
• For windshields contaminated with cleaning, clean the entire area
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean immediately, but do not soak or the
the entire windshield using steel wool ring will set.
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water. Seatbelts
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer WARNINGS
concentrate. Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
these actions may weaken the belt
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
webbing.
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover On vehicles equipped with
damage caused to the heated rear window seat-mounted airbags, do not use
grid lines. chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
CLEANING THE INTERIOR affect performance of the side airbag in a
crash.
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical
may not be covered by your warranty. solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not use household cleaning Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate
products or glass cleaners, which can stain the seatbelt retractor mechanism.
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame Cleaning may safely be carried out using
retardant abilities of the seat materials. mild soap and water. Let them dry
Note: We recommend distilled water when naturally, away from artificial heat.
cleaning.
Leather Interior (If Equipped)
Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats, Follow the same procedure as cleaning
Headliners and Floor Mats leather seats for cleaning leather
Note: Avoid soaking any surface. instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean
the entire surface. Suede Micro Fiber Fabric (If Equipped)
Note: Do not steam clean.
238
Vehicle Care
Note: To avoid spots or discoloration, clean Storage Compartments and Cup

the entire surface. Holders
Do not use the following products: To clean:
• Leather care products. • Take out any removable inserts.
• Household cleaners. • Wipe the surface with a soft, damp
• Alcoholic solutions. cloth and a mild soap and water
• Spot removers. solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft
cloth.
• Shoe polish.
To clean:
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner. Note: Follow the same procedure as
• Wipe the surface with a soft, damp cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
cloth and a mild soap and water instrument panels and leather interior trim
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft surfaces.
cloth. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
cleaning, clean the entire area water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
immediately, but do not soak or the soft cloth.
ring will set.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD an inconspicuous area.
Screens and Radio Screens You should:
Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
solvents or chemical solvents to clean the vacuum cleaner.
instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or • Clean and treat spills and stains as
radio screens. These cleaning products can soon as possible.
damage the screens. Do not use the following products as these
Clean the instrument panel and cluster may damage the leather:
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry leather conditioners.
these areas.
• Household cleaners.
Rear Windows • Alcohol solutions.
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to • Solvents or cleaners intended
clean the interior of the rear windows. specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
239
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT Body

DAMAGE • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
You should repair paintwork damage exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
caused by stones from the road or minor and the underside of front fenders.
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of • Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
products are available from an authorized stored in exposed locations.
dealer.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
Remove particles such as bird droppings, prevent rust.
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road
salt and industrial fallout before repairing • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
paint chips. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
Always read and follow the manufacturer’s when you wash your vehicle.
instructions before using the products.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
VEHICLE STORAGE a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
days or more, read the following
solvents.
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating Engine
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles • Change the engine oil and filter prior to
and their components for reliable, regular storage because used engine oil
driving. Under various conditions, contains contaminates which may
long-term storage may lead to degraded cause engine damage.
engine performance or failure unless you • Start the engine every 15 days for a
use specific precautions to preserve engine minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
components. with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
General operating temperature.
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated • With your foot on the brake, shift
place. through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• We recommend that you change the
• If vehicles are stored outside, they engine oil before you use your vehicle
require regular maintenance to protect again.
against rust and damage.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
240
Vehicle Care
Cooling system • Check under the hood for any foreign

material that may have collected
• Protect against freezing temperatures. during storage such as mice or squirrel
• When removing your vehicle from nests.
storage, check coolant fluid level. • Check the exhaust for any foreign
Confirm that there are no cooling material that may have collected
system leaks and that fluid is at the during storage.
recommended level.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
Battery inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep your vehicle 4.5 m back and forth to
connections clean. remove rust build-up.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
days without recharging the battery, oil and gas) to make sure there are no
we recommend that you disconnect leaks, and fluids are at recommended
the battery cables to maintain battery levels.
charge for quick starting.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
Note: It is necessary to reset memory battery cable ends and check for
features if battery cables are disconnected. damage.
Brakes Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 7.5 m every 15
days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
241
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service
A decal with tire pressure data is located station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford
in the driver’s door opening or on the B recommends the use of a digital or
pillar. dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Use the recommended cold inflation
intending to drive your vehicle and when pressure for optimum tire performance and
the tires are cold. wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy. WARNING
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire Under-inflation is the most common
sizes. Using other sizes could damage your cause of tire failures and may result
vehicle and will make the National Type in severe tire cracking, tread
Approval invalid. separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
Note: If you change the diameter of the tires of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
from that fitted at the factory, the flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
speedometer may not display the correct heat buildup and internal damage to the
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
dealer to have the engine management stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
system reprogrammed. control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
TIRE CARE to be flat!
Inflating Your Tires Always inflate your tires to the Ford

recommended inflation pressure even if it
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that
is less than the maximum inflation
your tires are properly inflated. Remember
pressure information found on the tire. The
that a tire can lose up to half of its air
Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
pressure without appearing flat.
is found on the Tire Label located on door
Every day before you drive, check your tires. opening or on the B-pillar. Failure to follow
If one looks lower than the others, use a the tire pressure recommendations can
tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires cause uneven treadwear patterns and
and adjust if required. adversely affect the way your vehicle
At least once a month and before long handles.
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare). Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by the Ford Motor
Company.
242
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change Note: If you are checking tire pressure when
the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you the tire is hot, (for example, driven more
do not maintain the inflation pressure at the than 1.6 km), never bleed or reduce air
levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may pressure. The tires are hot from driving and
experience a condition known as shimmy. it is normal for pressures to increase above
Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels or below recommended cold inflation
over a bump or dip in the road that does not pressure could be significantly
dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result under-inflated.
from significant under-inflation of the tires, Note: If you have to drive a distance to get
improper tires (load range, size, or type), or air for your tire(s), check and record the tire
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the pressure first and add the appropriate air
event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, pressure when you get to the pump. It is
you should slowly reduce speed by either normal for tires to heat up and the air
lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly pressure inside to go up as you drive.
applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease
as the vehicle speed decreases. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire the valve and measure the pressure.
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the 3. Add enough air to reach the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. recommended air pressure.
This pressure is normally higher than the Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by
manufacturer’s recommended cold pressing on the metal stem in the center of
inflation pressure which can be found next the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
to the driver's seat on the Tire Label your tire gauge.
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation pressure 4. Replace the valve cap.
should never be set lower than the 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
recommended pressure on the Safety including the spare.
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher
inflation pressure than the other tires. For
When weather temperature changes full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the
occur, tire inflation pressures also change. Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause information for a description. Store and
a corresponding drop of 0.07 bar in maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
frequently and adjust them to the proper Label.
pressure which can be found on the Tire
Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
To check the pressure in your tire(s): embedded that could poke a hole in the
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning tire and cause an air leak.
they are not hot from driving even 1 km. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
243
Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Damage

Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
Periodically inspect the tire treads for sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
uneven or excessive wear and remove the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread
objects such as stones, nails or glass that groove and separation in the tread or
may be wedged in the tread grooves. sidewall). If damage is observed or
Check the tire and valve stems for holes, suspected have the tire inspected by a tire
cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage professional. Tires can be damaged during
and repair or replace the tire and replace off-road use, so inspection after off-road
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls use is also recommended.
for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If internal Age
damage to the tire is suspected, have the
tire demounted and inspected in case it WARNINGS
needs to be repaired or replaced. For your Tires degrade over time depending
safety, tires that are damaged or show on many factors such as weather,
signs of excessive wear should not be used storage conditions, and conditions
because they are more likely to blow out of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
or fail. tires experience throughout their lives.
Improper or inadequate vehicle In general, tires should be replaced
maintenance can cause tires to wear after six years regardless of tread
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including wear. However, heat caused by hot
the spare, frequently, and replace them if climates or frequent high loading
one or more of the following conditions conditions can accelerate the aging
exist: process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
Tire Wear
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
E142546 wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
Tire wear indicators are moulded in to the as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
bottom of the tread grooves to aid in versus all-terrain) as those originally
determining when to replace the tire. Tires provided by Ford. The recommended tire
should be replaced before the tread wears and wheel size may be found on either the
down to the same height as the wear Safety Compliance Certification Label
indicators. (affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
244
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS Safety Practices

door-latch post, or the door edge that WARNINGS
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires;
the driver's door. If this information is not spinning the tires can tear the tire
found on these labels, then you should and cause an explosion. A tire can explode
contact your authorized dealer as soon as in as little as three to five seconds.
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not Do not spin the wheels at over
recommended by Ford can affect the 55 km/h. The tires may fail and injure
safety and performance of your vehicle, a passenger or bystander.
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, Driving habits have a great deal to do
personal injury and death. with your tire mileage and safety.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires *Observe posted speed limits.
and wheels, you should not exceed *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
the maximum pressure indicated on the
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below. If the *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
beads do not seat at the maximum against a curb when parking.
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try
again. Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s
Important: Remember to replace the always the possibility that you may
wheel valve stems when the road tires are eventually have a flat tire on the highway.
replaced on your vehicle. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of
The two front tires or two rear tires should traffic. This may further damage the flat
generally be replaced as a pair. tire, but your safety is more important.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
wheels are not designed to be used in disturbance while driving, or you suspect
aftermarket wheels. your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive with
The use of wheels or tires not caution until you can safely pull off the
recommended by Ford Motor Company road. Stop and inspect the tires for
may affect the operation of your tire damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
pressure monitoring system. damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
If the tire pressure monitoring system replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
indicator is flashing, the system is If you cannot detect a cause, have the
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility
might be incompatible with your tire or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
245
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
can cause the front end of your vehicle to is defined as a spare wheel and tire
become misaligned or cause damage to assembly that is different in brand, size or
your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to appearance from the road tires and wheels.
one side when you’re driving, the wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
may be out of alignment. Have an assembly it is intended for temporary use
authorized dealer check the wheel only and should not be used in a tire
alignment periodically. rotation.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear Note: After having your tires rotated,
can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of inflation pressure must be checked and
your tires and should be corrected by an adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive
vehicles and those with an independent Rotating your tires at the recommended
rear suspension may require alignment of interval of between 5,000 km to
all four wheels. 10,000 km will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
The tires should also be balanced and longer tire life.
periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel
assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and all-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires at left of
Tire Rotation diagram)
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear tires
and the vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, then you need to
update the settings for the system sensors.
Always perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If you do not
reset the system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary.
E142548
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask
an authorized dealer to check for and correct Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or corrected by rotating the tires.
mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation. WARNING
Do not scrub the sidewalls of the
tires when you are parking.
If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly

and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the curb.
246
Wheels and Tires
Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign Vehicles with Stability Control
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel When stability control is on, your vehicle
alignment is outside specification. may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. To reduce this, switch
Check the tire pressures (including the traction control off. See Using Traction
spare) when cold, every two weeks. Control (page 141).
USING SNOW CHAINS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

WARNINGS
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in WARNING
the loss of control of your vehicle, The tire pressure monitoring system
personal injury or death. is not a substitute for manually
Do not use snow chains on snow-free checking tire pressures. You should
roads. periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
Only fit snow chains to specified maintain tire pressures could increase the
tires. risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
If your vehicle is fitted with wheel
trims, remove them before fitting
snow chains. You must check the tire
pressures (including the spare
tire where applicable) every two
Note: Only use snow chains on applicable weeks when the tires are cold.
tire sizes. See Technical Specifications
(page 256). You must inflate the tires to the correct
Only use S-Class snow chains, 15 mm pressure. See Wheels and Tires (page
chain links. 242). The tire pressures are also on the tire
inflation pressure label (located on the
Only use manual tensioning chains. Do not edge of driver door or the B-Pillar).
use self-tensioning chains.
As a driver assistance feature, your vehicle
Only use snow chains on the rear axle. has a tire pressure monitoring system. A
More information on applicable tire sizes warning lamp will illuminate when one or
that support snow chains usage can be more of the tires are significantly
found later in this Owner's Manual. See under-inflated. If the low tire pressure
Technical Specifications (page 256). warning lamp illuminates, you should stop
Note: The anti-lock brake system continues your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so,
to operate normally. check the tires and inflate them to the
correct pressure.
Driving on under-inflated tires can:
• Cause them to overheat.
• Lead to tire failure.
• Reduce fuel efficiency.
247
Wheels and Tires
• Reduce tire life. If the vehicle is stationary overnight and

• Affect vehicle handling or stopping the temperature is significantly lower than
ability. the daytime temperature, tire pressures
may decrease by up to 0.2 bar when there
The system is not a substitute for correct is a drop in the ambient temperature of
tire maintenance. 17°C or more. The system detects this
You must maintain the correct tire pressure decrease as being significantly
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not below the correct inflation pressure and
illuminated the warning lamp. the warning lamp illuminates.
The tire pressure monitoring system has a Changing Tires With a Tire
system malfunction indicator to warn you Pressure Monitoring System
when the system is not operating correctly.
The malfunction indicator and low tire
pressure warning lamp have a combined
function. When the system detects a
malfunction, the warning lamp will flash
for approximately one minute and then
remain illuminated. This sequence will
occur every time you switch the ignition on
while the malfunction remains. The
system has detected a fault that requires
service.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able E142549
to detect or signal low tire pressures. A
malfunction may occur for a variety of You should always have tires serviced by
reasons, including the installation of a an authorized dealer.
replacement tire or wheel that prevents Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted with
the system from functioning correctly. a tire pressure sensor located inside the
Always check the tire pressure monitoring wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
system malfunction warning after sensor attaches to the valve stem. The tire
replacing one or more tires or wheels on covers the pressure sensor and it is not
your vehicle. Make sure the replacement visible unless the tire is removed. Take care
tires or wheels allow the system to when changing the tire to avoid damaging
continue to function correctly. See When the sensor.
the Temporary Spare Tire is Installed
in this section. Understanding the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures You must maintain the correct tire
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not
Under normal driving conditions tire illuminated the warning lamp.
pressures may increase by up to 0.3 bar
from a cold start situation. The system measures the pressure in the
road tires and displays a warning lamp in
the instrument cluster when a low pressure
is detected. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 71).
248
Wheels and Tires
The system detects this lower pressure as When You Believe the System is Not
being significantly below the correct Operating Correctly
inflation pressure and the warning lamp
illuminates. The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
When the Temporary Spare Tire is also warn you in the event the system is
Installed no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
If you need to replace a road wheel and concerning the system:
tire with the temporary spare wheel, the
system will continue to identify a defect. When Inflating the Tires
This is to remind you to repair the damaged
road wheel and tire and refit the repaired When inflating the tires the system may
road wheel and tire assembly to your not respond immediately to the air added
vehicle. To restore the correct operation to the tires.
of the system, you must have the repaired
road wheel and tire assembly refitted to
your vehicle.
249
Wheels and Tires
System Warning Lamps
Warning lamp Description Action
Solid warning lamp Tire(s) under-inflated 1. Make sure tires are at the correct
pressure. See Wheels and Tires
(page 242). The tire pressures are also
on the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar).
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure you must carry out the tire
pressure monitoring system reset
procedure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure in this chapter.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
assembly to your vehicle to restore the
correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
Solid warning lamp Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
initially followed by and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
a flashing warning assembly to your vehicle to restore the
lamp correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
If the Warning Lamp is On: Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Reset Procedure
1. Check each tire to verify that none are
flat. Overview
2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as You must carry out the system reset
necessary. procedure after each tire replacement or
3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all adjustment of the tire pressures.
the tires to the correct pressure.
4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring
system reset procedure.
250
Wheels and Tires
To maintain your vehicle load carrying If a flat tire is still present after you perform
capability, your vehicle requires different the tire pressure monitor reset procedure,
tire pressures in the front tires compared the warning indicator remains illuminated
to the rear tires. in the instrument cluster. Make sure all of
your tires are inflated to the correct
The system illuminates the warning lamp
pressure before performing the reset
at different pressures for the front and rear
procedure.
tires.
The tires need to be periodically rotated Type Approvals
to provide consistent performance and
For Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Radio
maximum tire life, the system needs to
Frequency Compliance details, See Type
know when the tires have been rotated to
Approvals (page 367).
determine which set of tires are on the
front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
of low tire pressures.
Lug Nuts
Carrying Out the System Reset
Procedure You can obtain replacement locking lug
nuts or a locking lug nut key using the from
1. Check the tire pressures and inflate all
your authorised Ford dealer, using the
the tires to the correct pressure.
reference number certificate.
Vehicle Jack
WARNINGS
Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel
in an emergency.
Check that the vehicle jack is not
damaged or deformed and the
thread is lubricated and clean.
Never place anything between the
E238926
vehicle jack and the ground.
2. Press and hold the tire pressure
monitor reset switch for 3 seconds. The Note: Use a workshop type hydraulic jack
warning indicator blinks 3 times to for changing between summer and winter
acknowledge the reset procedure was tires.
successful.
Note: If you are not using the factory
installed scissor jack, you can use a
hydraulic jack with a minimum lifting
capacity of 2,000 kg and a lifting plate with
a minimum diameter of 80 mm.
251
Wheels and Tires
E271861
A Wheel Brace.
B Jack Handle and Extensions.
2
C Vehicle Jack.
The jack, wheel brace, and winch extension 1

tool are in the stowage compartment
under the rear floor.
E206399
1. Lift the stowage bin lid (1).

2. Remove the locking strap and remove
the tools (2).
3. Rotate the retaining nut and remove
the jack (2).
252
Wheels and Tires
Spare Wheel 3. In the rear storage compartment, lift

rubber cover (2) to expose wheel
Note: If the spare wheel is not the same winch.
type and size as your vehicle road wheel,
drive the shortest distance possible. 4. Insert the assembled wheel brace and
winch extension tool into the guide
Note: Do not fit more than one spare wheel hole (3) and make sure it correctly
on your vehicle at any one time. locates. Turn the wheel brace
Note: The spare wheel has a label showing counterclockwise until the spare wheel
the maximum driving speed. Drive with lowers from underneath the vehicle
caution and at no more than the permitted and rests on the ground, and there is
maximum speed. slack in the cable.
Note: The usage of a dissimilar spare wheel
or tire at any one wheel location can lead
to impairment of the handling, stability and
braking performance, comfort and noise.
Note: The spare wheel is underneath the
rear of the vehicle.
1. Assemble the wheel brace and the
winch extension tool.
2. Lower the third row seat-back to assist
spare wheel winch operation. See
Rear Seats (page 112).
E133590
3 5. Pass the bracket and cable through the

wheel opening.
Jacking and Lifting Points

2 WARNING
You must use the specified jacking
points.
E206440
253
Wheels and Tires
E206244
A Emergency use only. Removing a Road Wheel

B Maintenance. WARNINGS
Park your vehicle so that you do not
obstruct the flow of traffic or place
yourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
Make sure that your vehicle is on firm
and level ground with the front
wheels pointing straight ahead.
Switch the ignition off and apply the
parking brake.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, shift into first or reverse
gear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Make sure all passengers are out of
E134692 your vehicle.
254
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when changing a wheel, shift
the transmission into park (P), set
the parking brake and use an appropriate
block or wheel chock to secure the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed. For example, when changing the
front left wheel, place an appropriate block
or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
Do not work on your vehicle when
the jack is the only support. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
E134693
Make sure that the vehicle jack is
vertical to the jacking point and the
base is flat on the ground. 3. Using the wheel brace, remove the lug
nuts and the road wheel.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face Installing a Road Wheel
down on the ground.
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other sizes could
damage your vehicle.
Make sure there is no grease or oil on
the threads or the surface between
the wheel lugs and nuts. This can
cause the lug nuts to loosen while driving.
Have the lug nuts checked for
tightness and the tire pressure
E79153
1. Assemble the wheel brace and winch Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact
extension tool. surfaces are free from foreign matter.
2. Insert the assembled wheel brace and
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug
winch extension tool into the vehicle
nuts are against the wheel.
jack and raise your vehicle until the tire
is clear of the ground. 1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the lug nuts and finger tight.
3. Install the locking lug nut key.
255
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Have the lug nuts checked for
tightness and the tire pressure
Note: If the spare wheel is different in size

or construction to the road wheels, have this
corrected as soon as possible.
Stowing the Flat Tire

Note: Do not raise the spare wheel carrier
without the wheel attached. Damage can
E79156
occur to the winch mechanism if raised
4. Install all of the lug nuts and partially without a wheel attached.
tighten them in the sequence shown. 1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,
5. Lower your vehicle and remove the with the outer face of the wheel facing
vehicle jack. up.
6. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in the 2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through the
sequence shown using the wheel center of the wheel.
brace. See Technical Specifications 3. Insert the winch extension tool into the
(page 256). winch and turn clockwise.
7. Position the projection of the cap and 4. Stow the wheel brace, vehicle jack and
the projection of the hub correctly. winch extension tool away.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Nut Torque

Vehicle Type Torque
All 135 Nm
Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)

Note: Refer to tire decal for applicable tire sizes.
256
Wheels and Tires
Tire Size Normal Load 2 Full Load

ECO
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

265/65 210 kPa 210 kPa 240 kPa 240 kPa 240 kPa 300 kPa
1
R17 112T
265/60 210 kPa 210 kPa 240 kPa 240 kPa 240 kPa 300 kPa
1
R18 110T
265/50 240 kPa 240 kPa N/A N/A 240 kPa 300 kPa
1
R20 107T
1 Only fit snow chains to specified tires.
2 ECO tire inflation pressures are recommended for optimal fuel consumption.
257
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI BI-TURBO DIESEL (156

KW/213 PS) (YN)
Measurement 2.0L TDCi
Capacity 1,996 cm³

Power output 157 kW(213PS) @ 3750 rpm
Maximum torque 500 Nm @ 1750-2000 rpm
Continuous engine speed 4500 rpm
Maximum Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Idle speed 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system Single Turbocharged/intercooled
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Ignition system Compression Ignition
258
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS)

(YM)
Measurement 2.0L TDCi
Capacity 1,996 cm³

Power output. 132 kW(180PS) @ 3500 rpm
Maximum torque. 420 Nm @ 1750-2500 rpm
Continuous engine speed. 4500 rpm
Maximum engine speed. 4900 rpm
Idle speed. 800 ± 150 rpm
Induction system. Single Turbocharged/intercooled
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Compression Ignition
259
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DIESEL
Engine type 2.2L TDCi
Capacity 2,198 cm³

Power output 110 kW (150 PS) @ 3700 rpm
Maximum torque 375 Nm @ 1500 - 2500 rpm
Maximum Intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Induction system Turbocharged intercooled
Firing order 1-3-4-2
260
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L DIESEL
Engine type 3.2L TDCi
Capacity 3,198 cm³

Power output 147kW (200 PS) @ 3000 rpm
Maximum torque 470 Nm @ 1750 - 2500 rpm
Maximum intermittent engine speed 4900 rpm
Induction system Turbocharged intercooled
Firing order 1-2-4-5-3
261
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
D
A
E F
B
E222835
Callout Dimension Description mm
A Maximum length. 4,903 mm

Overall width excluding
B 1,869 mm
exterior mirrors.
C Overall height excluding roof 1,837 mm
antenna.
262
Callout Dimension Description mm
D Wheelbase. 2,850 mm
E Front track. 1,560 mm
F Rear track. 1,564 mm
263
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE NUMBER
B
E266456
A Model.
B Paint code.
C Build date.
D Vehicle identification number.
The vehicle identification plate with your

vehicle identification number and
maximum weights is located on the
bottom of the lock side of the passenger A
E133363
door aperture.
A The vehicle identification
number is on the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
B The vehicle identification
number is also stamped beneath
the front door on the chassis, on
the right-hand side.
264
CAPACITIES AND WARNING

SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI The air conditioning refrigerant
BI-TURBO DIESEL (156 KW/213 system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. Only qualified
PS) (YN) , 2.0L DIESEL personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
Capacities the air conditioning refrigerant system can
cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter. 7

Engine oil without filter. 6.9
Clutch fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Manual transmission oil. 2.7 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (dry). 11.85 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (wet). 10.35 L
Air conditioning system refrigerant. 1.1 ± 0.025 kg
Air conditioning compressor lubricant. 220 ml
Brake fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Engine coolant automatic transmission. 11.2 L
Engine coolant manual transmission. 10.4 L
Windshield washer fluid. 4.5 L
Fuel tank. 80 L
Diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue®). 22 L
265
Specifications
Materials
Recommended fluid Specification
1 WSS-M2C913-D
Engine oil SAE 5W-30
2 WSS-M2C950-A
Manual Transmission - Motorcraft® Dual WSS-M2C200-D2
Clutch Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission - ULV ATF Fluid WSS-M2C949-A
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance WSS-M6C65-A2
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
3
WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C
Front axle oil - Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Rear axle oil - Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle oil (LSD) - Motorcraft® SAE WSP-M2C197-A
80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Rear axle - Motorcraft® Additive Friction EST-M2C118-A
Modifier
Transfer case - Motorcraft® MERCON® LV WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant WSH-M17B19-A
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor WSH-M1C231-B
Oil
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue®) WSS-M99C130-A
1 Formarkets with high sulphur content (more than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage
4 and below.
2 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage 5
and 6.
3 When using WSS-M97B44-D and WSS-M99P25-C mix together at 50% each.
266
Your engine has been designed to be used Do not use supplemental engine oil
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel additives because they are unnecessary
economy benefit while maintaining the and could lead to engine damage that may
durability of your engine. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Only use fluid that meets our Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
not meet the defined specification and or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
viscosity grade may lead to: of any fluid other than the recommended
• Component damage which may not be fluid may cause degraded brake
covered by the vehicle Warranty. performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
• Longer engine cranking periods Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
• Increased emission levels. products or other materials may result in
• Reduced engine performance. brake system damage and possible failure.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance. CAPACITIES AND
Topping up the oil:
SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L TDCI
DIESEL (132 KW/180 PS) (YM)
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
low sulphur content less than 50 ppm): Capacities
If you are unable to find an oil that meets
the specification, you must use SAE 5W-30 WARNING
that meets the specification defined by
ACEA A5/B5. The air conditioning refrigerant
system contains refrigerant under
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with high pressure. Only qualified
high sulphur content greater than 50 personnel should service the air
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that conditioning refrigerant system. Opening
meets the specification defined in the the air conditioning refrigerant system can
vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE cause personal injury.
10W-30 that meets the specification
defined by API CH-4.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter. 7L

Engine oil without filter. 6.9 L
Clutch fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Manual transmission oil. 2.7 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (dry). 11.85 L
10 Speed automatic transmission oil (wet). 10.35 L
267
Item Capacity
Air conditioning system refrigerant. 1.1 ± 0.025 kg

Air conditioning compressor lubricant. 220 ml
Brake fluid. Between the MIN line and
the MAX line
Engine coolant automatic transmission. 11.2 L
Engine coolant manual transmission. 10.4 L
Windshield washer fluid. 4.5 L
Fuel tank. 80 L
Diesel exhaust fluid (AdBlue®). 21 L
Specifications
Materials
1 WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - ULV ATF Fluid WSS-M2C949-A
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D
Modifier
268

Oil
1 Formarkets with high sulphur content (more than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage
4 & below.
2 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND emissions level stage 5
& 6.
Your engine has been designed to be used Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel high sulphur content greater than 50
economy benefit while maintaining the ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
durability of your engine. meets the specification defined in the
vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE
Only use fluid that meets our 10W-30 that meets the specification
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do defined by API CH-4.
not meet the defined specification and
viscosity grade may lead to: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
• Component damage which may not be and could lead to engine damage that may
covered by the vehicle Warranty. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
• Increased emission levels. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Reduced engine performance. or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
• Reduced fuel economy. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Degraded brake performance. performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Topping up the oil:
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with products or other materials may result in
low sulphur content less than 50 ppm): brake system damage and possible failure.
If you are unable to find an oil that meets
the specification, you must use SAE 5W-30
that meets the specification defined by
ACEA A5/B5.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.2L DIESEL
269
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter 8.55 L

Engine oil without filter 8.15 L
Clutch fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Manual transmission oil 2.7 L
Automatic transmission oil (dry) 10.5 L
Automatic transmission oil (wet) 9L
Air conditioning system refrigerant 0.975 ± 0.025 kg
Air conditioning compressor lubricant 200 ml
Brake fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Engine coolant (MT82) 11.5 L
Engine coolant (AT) 11.9 L
Windshield washer fluid 4.5 L
Fuel tank 80 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (AdBlue®) 20 L
Specifications
Materials
1 WSS-M2C913-C
WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C913-D
2 WSS-M2C921-A
270

3 WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - Motorcraft WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
4
Modifier
Oil
1 Formarkets with low sulphur content (less than 350 ppm)
2 For markets with high sulphur content (more than 350 ppm)
3 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND Stage 5 emissions
4 When using WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C mix together at 50% each.
Only use fluid that meets Ford

Your engine has been designed to be used
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel
economy benefit whilst maintaining the
viscosity grade may lead to:
durability of your engine.
• Component damage which may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods
271
• Increased emission levels. Do not use supplemental engine oil

• Reduced engine performance. additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
• Reduced fuel economy. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Degraded brake performance.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Topping up the oil: Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
low sulphur content less than 350 of any fluid other than the recommended
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that fluid may cause degraded brake
meets the specification, you must use SAE performance and not meet the Ford
5W-30 that meets the specification performance standards. Keep brake fluid
defined by ACEA A5/B5. clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with materials may result in brake system
high sulphur content greater than 350 damage and possible failure.
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
meets the specification defined in the
defined by API CH-4.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.2L DIESEL
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item Capacity
Engine oil with filter 9.75 L

Engine oil without filter 9.36 L
Clutch fluid Refer to Brake fluid (Between the MIN
line and the MAX line: brake fluid reser-
voir)
Manual transmission oil 2.7 L
Automatic transmission oil (dry) 10.5 L
Automatic transmission oil (wet) 9L
272
Item Capacity
Air conditioning compressor lubricant 200 ml

Air conditioning system refrigerant 0.975 ± 0.025 kg
Brake fluid Between the MIN line and the MAX line
Engine coolant 13.5 L
Windshield washer fluid 4.5 L
Fuel tank 80 L
Specifications
Materials
Engine oil SAE 5W-30 1

WSS-M2C913-C
1
WSS-M2C913-D
WSS-M2C913-D
WSS-M2C921-A
WSS-M2C950-A
Automatic Transmission - Motorcraft WSS-M2C938-A
MERCON® LV
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D
4
273

Modifier
Oil
1 Formarkets with low sulphur content (less than 350 ppm)
2 For markets with high sulphur content (more than 350 ppm)
3 For markets with low sulphur content (less than 50 ppm) AND Stage 5 emissions
4 When using WSS-M97B44-D with WSS-M99P25-C mix together at 50% each.
Your engine has been designed to be used Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with
with Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel high sulphur content greater than 350
economy benefit whilst maintaining the ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that
durability of your engine. meets the specification defined in the
Only use fluid that meets Ford 10W-30 that meets the specification
specifications. Using oil and fluids that do defined by API CH-4.
viscosity grade may lead to: Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
• Component damage which may not be and could lead to engine damage that may
covered by the vehicle Warranty. not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
• Increased emission levels. Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
• Reduced engine performance. or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
• Reduced fuel economy. fluid may cause degraded brake
• Degraded brake performance. performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
Topping up the oil:
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with water, petroleum products or other
low sulphur content less than 350 materials may result in brake system
ppm): If you are unable to find an oil that damage and possible failure.
meets the specification, you must use SAE
defined by ACEA A5/B5.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
274
Bulb Specification Power ( Watts)
Headlamp low beam.

1
H7 55
Headlamp low beam.

2
HIR2 55
Headlamp low beam.

5
D8S 25
Headlamp high beam.

3
H15 55
Headlamp high beam.

4
HB3 60
Daytime running lamps. LED

6
LED
Front position lamp. W5W 5
Front position lamp.

5
LED
6
LED
Front fog lamp. H8 35
Front fog lamp.

5
LED
6
LED
Front direction indicator. P21W/PY21W 21
Side direction indicator.

7
W5W/WY5W 5
Puddle lamp. W5W 5

Rear direction indicator. PY21W 21
Rear position lamp high
LED
6
LED
series.
Rear position lamp low
P21/5W 5
series.
Rear stop lamp. P21/5W 21
Central high mounted brake 6 LED
lamp. LED
Reversing lamp. W16W 16

Rear fog lamp. W21W 21
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Roof bar lamp. W5W 5
275
Bulb Specification Power ( Watts)
Interior lamp. W5W 5

Reading lamp. W5W 5
1 Reflector type.
2 Projector type.
3 With Daytime running lamps.
4 Without Daytime running lamps.
5 Vehicles with HID headlamps
6 Contact authorized dealer for replacement.
7 Bulb replacement is not possible as the bulb is an integral part of the unit. The side
direction indicator lamp unit has to be replaced.
276
VEHICLE PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS
Variant Drive Maximum

vehicle
speed
4x2 175 km/h
All 4x2
* 175 km/h
4x4 175 km/h

*
Vehicles with increased ride height.
277
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: Listening to loud audio for long

periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
Radio reception factors
Distance and Strength The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger
signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-
ence in the audio system.
CD and CD Player Information MP3 and WMA Track and Folder

Structure
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
12 cm audio compact discs only. Due to Audio systems capable of recognizing and
technical incompatibility, certain recordable playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and re-recordable compact discs may not and folder structures work as follows:
function correctly when used in Ford CD • There are two different modes for MP3
players. and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade MP3 and WMA folder mode.
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
become jammed. You should use a folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
permanent felt tip marker rather than disc. The player numbers each MP3
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. and WMA track on the disc (noted by
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
authorized dealer for more information. T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped WMA files may be less depending on
discs or discs with a scratch protection film the structure of the CD and exact
attached. model of radio present.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
278
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and
a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one
level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder). In
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file folder mode, the system only plays the
extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
AUDIO UNIT
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
WARNING
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present, (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
279
Audio System
E248373
A Volume and power. Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse

B CD slot. In radio mode, select a radio station and
press either button. The system stops at
C Tune the first station it finds in that direction. In
D Seek, fast forward and reverse. CD mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to move
E CD eject.
quickly forward or backward through the
current track.
Volume and Power
CD Eject
Press to switch the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume. Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot
Insert a CD.
Tune
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
280
Audio System
RADIO
Antenna
E191758
The auxiliary input jack allows you to

connect and play music from your portable
E261117 music player through your vehicle speakers.
You can use any portable music player
You can temporarily remove the mast by designed for use with headphones. Your
unscrewing it from the base. audio extension cable must have male
Note: Remove the antenna mast before connectors at each end.
entering a car wash. Make sure you firmly 1. Make sure your vehicle is stationary
screw in the mast when reattaching it to with the audio unit and the portable
maintain optimum radio reception. music player switched off.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
AUDIO INPUT JACK (If Equipped) device into the audio input jack.
3. Switch on the radio and select either a
WARNINGS tuned FM station or a CD.
Driving while distracted can result in 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
injury. We strongly recommend that 5. Switch on your device and adjust the
you use extreme caution when using any volume to half the maximum level.
device that may take your focus off the 6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe appears in the display. You should hear
operation of your vehicle. We recommend music from your device even if it is low.
against the use of any hand-held device 7. Adjust the volume on your device until
while driving and encourage the use of it reaches the volume level of the FM
voice-operated systems when possible. station or CD. Do this by switching back
Make sure you are aware of all applicable and forth between the AUX and FM or
local laws that may affect the use of CD controls.
Use the vehicle audio unit buttons to
Always place your device in a secure restore playback from the vehicle audio
location in your vehicle so it does not unit, while your device remains connected.
become a projectile in a sudden stop
or crash. Failure to follow this instruction Note: The audio extension cable must be
could result in personal injury. long enough for you to safely store the
device when your vehicle is moving.
281
Audio System
Note: For optimum performance when The USB port allows you to plug in media
using any auxiliary device set the volume on playing devices, memory sticks and charge
the device high. This reduces audio devices, if supported.
interference when charging the device using
the vehicle power supply.
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
Note: For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your device while
WARNING
your vehicle is moving.
USB PORT (If Equipped) injury. We strongly recommend that
WARNING device that may take your focus off the
Driving while distracted can result in road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
loss of vehicle control, crash and operation of your vehicle. We recommend
injury. We strongly recommend that against the use of any hand-held device
you use extreme caution when using any while driving and encourage the use of
device that may take your focus off the voice-operated systems when possible.
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe Make sure you are aware of all applicable
operation of your vehicle. We recommend local laws that may affect the use of
against the use of any hand-held device electronic devices while driving.
voice-operated systems when possible. The media hub may be on the instrument
Make sure you are aware of all applicable panel or center console.
local laws that may affect the use of The media hub may contain one or more
electronic devices while driving. of the following inputs:
• USB ports. See USB Port (page 282).
• Audio input jack. See Audio Input
Jack (page 281).
E201595
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
282
Audio System
Audio unit display Rectification
Please check CD General error message for CD fault conditions, such as

cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure
the disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or
replace disc with known music disc. If error persists
contact your dealer.
CD drive malfunction General error message for CD fault conditions such as
possible mechanism fault.
CD drive high temp. Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until
it has cooled down.
IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE General error message for iPod fault conditions, such
as cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted
correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.
283
SYNC™ 3
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen
WARNING
voice-operated systems when possible. E224960

local laws that may affect the use of A Status bar.
B Home screen. See Home
Screen (page 288).
About SYNC
C Clock. See Settings (page 313).
The system allows you to interact with the D Outside air temperature.
entertainment, information and
communication systems on your vehicle E Feature bar.
using voice commands and a touchscreen.
The system provides easy interaction with Status Bar
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings.
Note: You can switch the system on and
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to E224961
when your vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h.

A Left-hand side temperature.
B Heated steering wheel on.
C Right-hand side temperature.
D Cell phone microphone muted.
E Audio system muted.
F Software update installed.
G Wi-Fi connected.
284
SYNC™ 3
H Wi-Fi networks available. Emergency Assistance

I Cell phone roaming. WARNINGS
J Text message received. Unless the Emergency Assistance
setting is on prior to a collision, the
K Emergency Assistance off. system does not attempt to place
L Bluetooth connection active. an emergency call. This could delay the
response time, increasing the risk of serious
M Cell phone network signal injury or death.
strength.
Do not wait for Emergency
Note: Messages also appear in the status Assistance to make an emergency
bar. Select the message to use the call if you can do it yourself. Dial
associated feature. emergency services immediately to avoid
a delayed response time. If you do not hear
Emergency Assistance within five seconds
Feature Bar
of the crash, the system or cell phone may
Select to use the radio, the CD be damaged or non-functional.
player, a USB, a media player or Always place your phone in a secure
a Bluetooth device. See location in your vehicle so it does not
Entertainment (page 295). become a projectile or get damaged
Select to use the climate in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
controls. serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent Emergency
Note: Not available through the system on Assistance from working properly.
all models.
Select to make calls and access Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance
the phonebook on your cell feature must be set on before the incident.
phone. See Phone (page 304). Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance
feature only operates in territories that are
Select to use the navigation supporting the feature.
system. See Navigation (page
309). Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the Emergency
Select to search for and use Assistance Privacy Notice later in this
compatible apps on your iOS or section for important information.
Android device. See Apps (page
312). Note: If any user sets Emergency Assistance
to on or off, that setting applies for all paired
Select to adjust system settings. phones. If Emergency Assistance is switched
See Settings (page 313). off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an
icon displays on the status bar.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC Emergency Assistance works
See Cleaning the Interior (page 238). with most cellular phones, some may have
trouble using this feature.
285
SYNC™ 3
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding In the Event of a Crash

knee airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts
[if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
be able to contact emergency services by triggers for Emergency Assistance). If a
dialing Emergency number through a connected cell phone sustains damage or
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled loses its connection to SYNC during a
phone. You can learn more about the crash, SYNC will search for and try to
Emergency Assistance feature, by visiting: connect to a previously paired cell phone;
SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Website
Before making the call:
www.fordsync.com • SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
For important information about airbag If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off attempts to dial Emergency.
please see the Supplementary Restrains
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
your owner manual.
Emergency, to cancel the call, press
To switch Emergency Assistance on and Cancel on your screen or press and
off please view the settings information. hold the phone button on your steering
See Settings (page 313). wheel."
To make sure that Emergency Assistance If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
works correctly: makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
• SYNC must be powered and working message plays for the Emergency operator,
properly at the time of the incident and and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle
throughout feature activation and use. is able to talk with the operator. Be
prepared to provide your name, phone
• The Emergency Assistance feature number and location immediately, because
must be set on before the incident. not all Emergency systems are capable of
• You must pair and connect a receiving this information electronically.
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC. Emergency Assistance May Not Work
If
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and • Your cellular phone or Emergency
maintain an outgoing call at the time Assistance hardware sustains damage
of the incident. in a crash.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
must have adequate network coverage, system has no power.
battery power and signal strength.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
• The vehicle must have battery power are the ones paired and connected to
and be located in a territory where the system.
Emergency Assistance is supported.
286
SYNC™ 3
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice • Do not attempt to service or repair the

system. Have an authorized dealer
When you switch on Emergency check your vehicle.
Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
services that your vehicle has been in a • Do not operate playing devices if the
crash involving the deployment of an power cords or cables are broken, split
airbag or activation of the fuel pump or damaged. Place cords and cables
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to out of the way, so they do not interfere
Emergency Assistance may also be with the operation of pedals, seats,
capable of electronically or verbally compartments or safe driving abilities.
disclosing to Emergency operators your • Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle location or other details about your vehicle during extreme conditions as it
vehicle or crash to assist Emergency could cause them damage. See your
operators to provide the most appropriate device's user guide for further
emergency services. If you do not want to information.
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on. Updating the System
Safety Information Updating the System Using a USB Drive
WARNING Downloading an Update

Driving while distracted can result in 1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
loss of vehicle control, crash and regional Ford website.
injury. We strongly recommend that 2. Download the update.
device that may take your focus off the Note: The website notifies you if an update
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe is available.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend 3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
against the use of any hand-held device Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
while driving and encourage the use of meet the minimum requirements detailed
voice-operated systems when possible. on the website.
local laws that may affect the use of 4. Follow the instructions provided to
electronic devices while driving. download the update to the USB drive.
Installing an Update
Note: You can use the system when an
installation is in progress.
1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
the USB ports.
2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
Note: Installation starts automatically
within 10 minutes.
287
SYNC™ 3
Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi Privacy Information

Network Connection
When you connect a cellular phone to the
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network system, it creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone.
Select the settings option on the This profile helps in offering you more
feature bar. cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
Select System Wi-Fi. may contain data about your cellular
Select Available Wi-Fi Networks. phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
Select an available Wi-Fi network. of calls when your cell phone was not
Note: Enter the network password to connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect to a secure network. connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
Switching Automatic System Updates media content. The system also records a
On short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
Select the settings option on the
log profile and other system data may be
feature bar.
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
Select General. The cellular profile, media device index,
Select Automatic System Updates. and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
Switch automatic system updates on. accessible only in your vehicle when the
The system is now set to check for and cellular phone or media player is
receive system updates when it is connected.
connected to a Wi-Fi network. If you no longer plan to use the system or
Note: You can use the system when a your vehicle, we recommend you perform
download is in progress. a master reset to erase all stored
information. See Settings (page 313).
Note: If the system is disconnected from System data cannot be accessed without
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in special equipment and access to your
progress, the download continues the next vehicle's module. Ford Motor Company
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi does not access the system data for any
network. purpose other than as described absent
consent, a court order, or where required
Additional Information and
by law enforcement, other government
Assistance authorities, or other third parties acting
For additional information and assistance, with lawful authority. Other parties may
we recommend that you contact an seek to access the information
authorized dealer or refer to the regional independently of Ford Motor Company.
Ford website.
HOME SCREEN
288
SYNC™ 3
E224134
Item Tile Home screen display
A Audio Shows the active media source.

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
compass.
B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The
status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal
strength, battery charge, Emergency Assistance setting state
(On or Off), new text messages and roaming.
C Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in real
time.
When you have navigation active you can see the next turn on
your route.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
audio information.
* If equipped.
289
SYNC™ 3
You can touch any of the feature displays You can access each feature controlled by
to access that feature. SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
Anytime you select the home button, the To activate the SYNC 3 voice
system returns you to this screen. commands push the voice
E142599 button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice be the name of anything, such as artist, the
commands, to control features like audio name of contact or number. The context
and climate controls. By using voice and the description of the command tell
commands, you can keep your hands on you what to say for this dynamic option.
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Voice Command Action and Description
Main Menu Brings you to the main menu.

Go back Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands (if equipped)
Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Included here are some of the most Audio Voice Commands

popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be a radio
frequency number, or the name of an artist,
album, song or a genre.
290
SYNC™ 3
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command Description
AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM

frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".
FM ___
Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
Play Playlist ___ selection. Your system must finish indexing
Play Artist ___ before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Play Album ___ Penny Lane".
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:

Climate Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 15°C-30°C.

Climate Help
291
SYNC™ 3
Phone Voice Commands You can use voice commands to connect

your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the
Pairing a Phone system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Pair Phone Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process. See Settings (page 313).
Making Calls
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the

contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command Description
<0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.
Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
292
SYNC™ 3
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Text Messages
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message

Navigation Voice Commands (If navigation voice commands it can be a POI
Equipped) category or an address.
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality.

Find a ___ State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
such as "Find restaurants".
Find POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Destination Nearest State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
___ nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".
Destination Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destination
Destination Home Allows you to route to your home address.
293
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:

Cancel Route Cancels the current route.

Detour Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Displays the active route.
Where Am I Provides current location.
Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:
Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find New Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
<App Name> At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
<App Name> Help SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
294
SYNC™ 3
Voice Settings Commands

You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Standard
Interaction Mode Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Advanced
Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
Phone Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust To disable this automatic fan speed
the volume of the system voice prompts. reduction feature during voice sessions,
While prompt is active, adjust the volume press and hold the climate control AC and
control up or down to your desired setting. Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
Note: Depending on the current climate 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
control settings, the fan speed may the above sequence.
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
ENTERTAINMENT
295
SYNC™ 3
E224963
Item Message Description
A Sources This displays your selected media source.

B Presets This allows you to select the preset bank you
want to view.
C Preset This shows you the stations that you have saved
as presets.
The available options may change

You can access these options using the
depending on the source that you select.
touchscreen or voice commands.
These options may include:
296
SYNC™ 3
Message and description
Direct Tune A popup appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of

a station.
Traffic (TA) Allows you to switch Traffic Announcements on and off.
Stations A list of all available radio stations appears.
You can select a station by pressing any list entry on the
touchscreen. For more entries, you can scroll down using
the up and down arrows, the slider or by swiping down the
list.
Sources DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio

Note: DAB+ Radio may not be available in
Press this button to select the source of
all markets.
media you want to listen to.
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen, select:

Menu item
Direct Tune A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency

of a station.
Station List A list of all available radio stations appears. You can select
a station by pressing any list entry on the touchscreen. For
a longer list, you can scroll up and down using the up and
down arrows, the slider or by swiping up or down the list.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
297
SYNC™ 3
and then press and hold one of the

Once you have entered the station's memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
call numbers, you can select: briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
Menu item Action and descrip-
tion There are two preset banks available for
AM, three banks for FM and three banks
Enter Press to begin for DAB (if equipped). To access additional
playing the station presets, tap the preset button. The
you have entered. indicator on the preset button shows which
bank of presets you are currently viewing.
Cancel Press to exit
without changing CD
the station.
Once you select this option, the system
Presets returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
To set a new preset, tune to the station
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
298
SYNC™ 3
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
play buttons to control the audio playback. provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audiobooks
299
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,

USB Ports exFAT, and NTFS.
The USB ports are in the center console or SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
behind a small access door in the from your USB device by metadata tags.
instrument panel. Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
This feature allows you to plug in USB media files, provide information about the
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives file.
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature. If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
Select this option to play audio from your tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
USB device. metadata tags as unknown.
Apps SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
The system supports the use of certain devices.
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
CLIMATE
options depending on the app's content.
Climate is optional for your vehicle.
See Apps (page 312).
Touch the climate button on the
Supported Media Players, Formats touchscreen to access your climate control
and Metadata Information features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
The system is capable of hosting nearly may look different from one of the screens
any digital media player, including iPod, shown below. Your screen may not contain
iPhone, and most USB drives. all of the features shown.
Supported audio formats include MP3, Note: You can switch temperature units
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Supported audio file extensions include Settings (page 313).
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
300
SYNC™ 3
E243778
Callout Item Description
A AUTO Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select

the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
DUAL This button lights up when the passenger controls are active.
To switch the dual zone operation off and link the passenger
temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button
to switch it off.
B Power Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
301
SYNC™ 3
C Right-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.

front seat
temper-
ature:
D Fan speed Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air
circulated in your vehicle.
E Rear A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control
options.
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control func-
tions off and on.
Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings. Touch it again to prevent the
rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings
If your vehicle has automatic climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings to the Auto settings of the
driver.
Touch the up and down arrows to adjust the temperature.
A/C A popup appears on the screen to display the air conditioning
options.
MAX Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air.
A/C Touch again for normal A/C operation. MAX A/C
distributes air through instrument panel vents and
may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle.
MAX A/C is more economical and efficient than
normal A/C mode.
A/C Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use
A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. A/C engages automat-
ically in MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost
302
SYNC™ 3
Recircu- Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off which

lated may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
air: the interior and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior. Recirculated air also engages automatically
when you select MAX A/C. You can engage this
manually in any airflow mode except defrost. It may
also turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce fog potential.
F Manual Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
airflow
distribution Floor Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents
controls and rear seat floor vents.
G Defrost A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.

Select these controls individually or together to direct the air
flow to the desired area.
MAX Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside
Defrost: air flows through the windshield vents, the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
temperature dial returns to the full heat position.
You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin
covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns on when you select
MAX Defrost. Touch this button again to return to
the previous airflow selection.
Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the previous airflow selec-
tion. When on, defrost provides outside air to reduce
window fogging and distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Touch
again to return to the pervious airflow selection.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when Defrost is on.
H Left-hand Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.
front seat
temperature
303
SYNC™ 3
PHONE 2. A prompt alerts you to search for your

vehicle model on your phone.
WARNING 3. Select your vehicle model as it displays
on your phone.
loss of vehicle control, crash and 4. Confirm that the six-digit number
injury. We strongly recommend that appearing on your phone matches the
you use extreme caution when using any six-digit number on the touchscreen.
device that may take your focus off the 5. The touchscreen indicates when the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
electronic devices while driving. Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Hands-free calling is one of the main Menu Item

features of SYNC 3. Once you pair your cell
Add a Bluetooth Device
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While Then select:
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
functionality.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time 2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with 3. Confirm that the six-digit number
the system before using the functions in appearing on your phone matches the
hands-free mode. six-digit number on the touchscreen.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to 4. The touchscreen indicates when the
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if pairing is successful.
necessary.
To add a phone, select: the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
Menu Item compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Add a This is on the phone
Bluetooth feature screen or you can At a minimum, most cell phones with
Device use the voice command. Bluetooth wireless technology support the
See Using Voice Recogni- following functions:
tion (page 290). • Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. • Dialing a number.
304
SYNC™ 3
• Call waiting notification. To check your phone’s compatibility, see

• Caller identification. your phone’s manual or visit the regional
ford website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook Phone Menu
download, are phone-dependent features.
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E224136
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A Recent Call Displays your recent calls.

List You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All Incoming Outgoing Missed
B Contacts All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
305
SYNC™ 3
Item Menu Item Action and Description
A-Z Jump Selecting this button allows

you to choose a specific letter
to view.
C Phone Settings Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Phone (page 304).
D Text Messages Displays all recent text messages.
E Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call Press this button to begin a
call.
F Do Not Disturb Touch this button to let SYNC automatically reject your incoming
calls. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Users with phones having voice services

may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 290). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
306
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, To accept the call, select:

select:
Menu Item
Menu Item Action and Description
Accept
Contacts You can then select the Note: You can also accept the call by
name of the contact you pressing the phone button on the steering
want to call. Any numbers wheel.
stored for that contact
display. You can then To reject the call, select:
select the number that you
want to call. The system Menu Item
begins the call.
Reject
To call a number from your recent calls, Note: You can also reject the call by
select: pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
Recent Call You can then select an logs it as a missed call.
List entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call. During a Phone Call
To call a number that is not stored in During a phone call, the contacts name
your phone, select: and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
Menu Item Action and Description The phone status items are also visible:
Phone Select the digits of the • Signal Strength.
Keypad number you wish to call. • Battery.
Call The system begins the call. You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
307
SYNC™ 3
Item
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
End Call Immediately end a the cell phone or
phone call. You can back to SYNC 3.
also press the
button on the Text Messaging
steering wheel.
Note: Downloading and sending text
Keypad Press this to access messages using Bluetooth are cell
the phone keypad. phone-dependent features.
Mute You can switch the Note: Certain features in text messaging
microphone off so are speed-dependent and not available
the caller does not when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
hear you. 5 km/h.
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the sender name, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View View the text on the touchscreen.
Call To call the sender.
Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Close To exit the screen.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) some SYNC 3 features.
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
and Android Auto to access your phone. features use mobile data.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Apple CarPlay
Auto, you can:
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
• Make calls. newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
• Send and receive messages. the latest iOS version is recommended.
• Listen to music. 1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
• Use your phone's voice assistant. USB Port (page 282).
308
SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the

touchscreen. To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple Menu Item
CarPlay.
Android Auto Preferences
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when Your device is listed if SYNC detects
plugged into a USB port. Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select: Disable
Menu Item
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
Apple CarPlay Preferences screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your To return to SYNC 3, select the
device and select: speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
Disable touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
app.
Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of

two main features, destination mode and
Android Auto is compatible with most map mode.
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
Map Mode
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from a leading Android app Map mode shows advanced viewing
store to prepare your device (this may comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
require mobile data usage). and 3D city models (when available). 2D
Note: The Android Auto App may not be city maps show detailed outlines of
available within your current market. buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See infrastructure for the most essential cities
USB Port (page 282). around the globe.
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
4. Follow the prompts that appear on objects that are typically recognizable and
your device. have a certain tourism value.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.
309
SYNC™ 3
3D city models are complete 3D models 3D map mode provides an

of entire city areas including navigable elevated perspective of the map.
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. Adjust this viewing angle and
3D landmarks and city models appear in E251637 rotate the map 180 degrees by
3D map mode only. Coverage of these touching the map twice, and
varies and improves with updated map then dragging your finger along the shaded
releases. bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
Select the zoom in icon to see a Motorway Services Select the
closer view of the map. icon to see service stations near
you. If your vehicle is low on fuel,
E251643 E251639 station icons automatically
Select the zoom out icon to see display on the map.
a farther away view of the map.
Parking Destinations Select
You can adjust the view in preset this icon to see parking facilities
E251642 increments. You can also pinch near you.
to zoom in or out of the map. E251640
The information bar tells you the names Destination Menu This icon
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover appears when you are near a
over them with the crosshair curser. destination. You can check the
You can change your view of the map by E251638 trip summary, find places near
tapping on the location indicator icon on you, save the current location, or
the right hand side of the screen. You can pause navigation.
choose from the following options:
Navigation Menu
2D This always shows the
direction of forward travel to be Navigation Menu Select this
upward on the screen. icon to open the Navigation
E251635 Menu.
2D north up always shows the E251641
northern direction to be upward
on the screen.
E251636
310
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Menu Options

Icon Function
New Route Select your destination by entering an address or its coordinate, or by

selecting a Place, a Saved Location, or a Saved Route. You can also
look up your recent destinations from History.
Multipoint Build your route from one or more route points. You can also plan a
Route route independently of your current GPS position by setting a new
starting point.
Useful Informa- Access additional options and check navigation-related information.
tion
Combined You can use the Search in All function to search all destination types
Search in a certain location.
Address You can enter a partial or whole address to find a destination.
Places You can search for Places of Interest in the Places menu.
Saved Route Displays your previously saved routes.
Coordinates You can search for a destination by entering coordinates.
Location Tap the location on the map to select your destination.
Settings Customise the way the navigation software works.
The following are available during your planned route:

Menu Item Function
Add Waypoint Add an intermediate destination to your route.

Detours and See route alternatives to avoid parts of the route, or to avoid a specific
Alternatives road from your planned route.
Route Summary View the route in its full length on the map and check route parameters
and route alternatives.
Delete Route Delete your route.
Delete Delete the next waypoint or the whole route. This is displayed if there
Waypoint is a multipoint route.
311
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Map Updates 3. If there are any updates, a window

appears where you can download the
You can update your navigation system necessary files to your flash drive.
using a computer with an internet
connection, the Naviextras toolbox and a 4. Turn on your navigation system and
flash drive larger than 2GB. plug the flash drive into your system.
The updates begin automatically.
Download and install the Naviextras
Toolbox from the following website: APPS
Website
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
https://www.naviextras.com and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smart phone apps. When
Before updating, retrieve your Vehicle an app is running through AppLink, you can
Identification Number (VIN) and Electronic control main features of the app through
Serial Number (ESN) from the SYNC 3 voice commands and steering wheel
Settings menu. controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
Settings vary by market.
Menu Item Note: You must pair and connect your
smart phone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
General access AppLink.
Then select: Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
About SYNC
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smart phone devices and
To update your navigation system: troubleshooting tips please visit the regional
1. Plug a 2GB or larger flash drive into Ford website.
your computer.
Note: Make sure you have an active
2. Enter the required Vehicle Identification account for the app that you have
Number (VIN) and the Electronic Serial downloaded. Some apps will work
Number (ESN) in the Naviextras automatically with no setup. Other apps will
Toolbox. want you to configure your personal settings
and personalize your experience by creating
stations or favorites. We recommend you
do this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smart phone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
312
SYNC™ 3
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app App Permissions

is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile The system organizes the App permissions
device. into groups. You can individually grant
these group permissions. You can change
a permission group status any time when
Menu Item Action and Descrip- not driving, by using the settings menu.
tion While in the settings menu, you can also
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search see the data included in each group.
and connect to When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
compatible app(s) the system may ask you to grant certain
running on your permissions, for example Vehicle
mobile device. information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 The settings menu offers individual group
requires user consent to send and receive permission control.
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the Note: You are only prompted to grant
connected device. permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is Note: If you disable group permissions,
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
module number, anonymous usage 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
statistics and debugging information. settings menu.
Updates may automatically take place.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for SETTINGS
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system. Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is features. To access additional settings,
not responsible for any extra charges you swipe the screen left or right.
incur from your service provider, when your
vehicle sends or receives data through the Sound
connected device. This includes any
additional charges you incur due to driving Pressing this button allows you to adjust
out of range of your home network. the following:
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 313).
313
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.
Treble Adjusts the high frequency level.
Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level.
Bass Adjusts the low frequency level.
Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.
Speed Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
Compensated or turns the feature off.
Vol.
Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings Stereo
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Podcast Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Slower Normal Faster
Gracenote® Switches on an off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
Management such as genre, artist, album.
314
SYNC™ 3
Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Informa- This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
tion media device.
Update Media Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.
Index
You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Clock Format Select how time displays.

Reset Clock to When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any Bluetooth

updates you make to the settings.
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
Menu Item Action
Bluetooth Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Phone

Bluetooth-enabled device.
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth the system before using the functions in
device is the same as pairing a phone. See hands-free mode.
To add a phone in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
315
SYNC™ 3

To add a phone, select: 2. Select your phone's name when it
Menu Item appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
Add Phone appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the pairing is successful.
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model the system permission to access
as it displays on your phone. information. To check your phone’s
4. Confirm that the six-digit number compatibility, see your phone’s manual
appearing on your phone matches the or visit the website.
six-digit number on the touchscreen. Other features, such as text messaging
5. The touchscreen indicates when the using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
pairing is successful. download, are phone-dependent features.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give To check your phone’s compatibility, see
the system permission to access your phone’s manual or visit the regional
information. To check your phone’s Ford website.
compatibility, see your phone’s manual Once you have paired a device you can
or visit your regional Ford website. adjust the following options.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
Device the previous table.
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
316
SYNC™ 3
Disconnect
Make Favorite Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.
Delete Removes the selected device from the system.
Pressing the info icon next to the device

name allows you to see phone and device
information.
Manage Contacts
Auto Phonebook Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
Download phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name Last Name
Re-download Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.
Phonebook
Delete Phone- Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
book in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Set Phone Ringtone

No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.
Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
317
SYNC™ 3
Text Message Notification

No Alert No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
You can enable and disable the following options as well:

Mute Audio in When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
Privacy duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Roaming When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
Warning you attempt to place a call.
Low Battery When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
Notification is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off

Emergency Assistance (If Equipped) setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
Note: The SYNC Emergency Assistance you can adjust the following option:
feature only operates in territories that are
supporting the feature.
Set Emergency You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
Contacts book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the Emer-
gency Assistance call process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
318
SYNC™ 3
FM HD Radio Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broad-

casts.
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio source,
if equipped and avail-
able)
Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media
source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio
text.
Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your
current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned
source.
News Announcements
Regional
Alternate frequency
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Navigation (If Equipped)

You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
319
SYNC™ 3
POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
Once this feature is activated you can select Select POIs
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
Incident Map This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
Icons to have displayed on the navigation map.
Route Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Route Preferences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always Use ___ Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Route calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Automatically The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
Find Parking you approach your destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Avoid Traffic You can select the following to have the system:
Problems
Avoid Freeways Avoid Toll Roads Avoid Ferries/Car Trains
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance You can adjust how the system provides prompts.
Prompts
320
SYNC™ 3
Voice and Tones

Voice Only
Tones Only
Note: All Mobile Apps may not be

Mobile Apps (If Equipped) compatible with the system.
You can enable the control of compatible Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or is not responsible for any additional charges
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable you may receive from your service provider,
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent when your vehicle sends or receives data
to send and receive app authorization through the connected device. This includes
information and updates using the data any additional charges incurred due to
plan associated with the connected device. driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Mobile Apps Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile This provides information on the current state of available app
Apps updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps…
The system has No update is The system is trying to receive
detected a new app required. an update.
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
321
SYNC™ 3
Request Update Select this button if an

update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.
There may also Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
be SYNC 3 sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
enabled apps can see which signals are included in each group.
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for General

any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any You can adjust the following:
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Menu Item
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in one of the

selectable languages.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Touch Screen Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software.
Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
322
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi You can adjust the following:
Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
View Available This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
Wi-Fi Available The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
Notifications network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Tap a color once to switch on ambient
lighting. This sets the color to the highest Vehicle
intensity.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
You can drag the colors up and down to these features.
increase or decrease the intensity.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera You can enable or disable this option using the slider.
Delay
(if equipped)
323
SYNC™ 3
Enhanced Park Aids

(if equipped)
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Display Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the
screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Mode You can select:
Auto The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Night The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Auto Dim Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
324
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts

and confirmations.
Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's
name with you before making a call.
Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen

Valet Mode PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the To unlock the system, enter the same pin
system is unlocked with the correct PIN. number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
When you select valet mode a pop-up again.
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
you to input the code. However, should questions arise, please
Note: If the system is locked and you refer to the tables below.
cannot remember the PIN, please contact To check your cell phone's compatibility,
the Customer Relationship Center. refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.
Cell phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
There is back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your cell Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC 3 performance.
During a call, I Try switching your cell phone off, resetting

can hear the it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
other person Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
malfunction.
but they cannot 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
hear me. icon on the phone screen.
325
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
During a call, I To restart your system, shut down the

cannot hear the engine, open and close the door, and then
The system may need to
other person lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
be restarted.
and they cannot Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
hear me. and the lighted USB port is off.
This is a cell phone-
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
SYNC 3 is not contacts from your phone. Refer to your
able to down- cell manual.
load my phone- Possible cell phone You must switch on your cell phone and
book. malfunction. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
The system contacts from your phone. Refer to your
says "Phone- cell manual.
book down-
If the missing contacts are stored on your
loaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
memory.
book is empty or
is missing You must switch on your cell phone and
contacts. the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
dependent feature.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
I am having
trouble Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
connecting my deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
cell phone to Possible cell phone again.
SYNC 3. malfunction.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
326
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Switch the auto download setting off.

dependent feature.
Possible cell phone Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
malfunction. it or removing the battery, then try again.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
Text messaging • Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
is not working from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
on SYNC 3. settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
dependent feature.
incoming text messages.
Audible text
messages do Because each cell phone is different, refer
not work on my to your device's manual for the specific cell
cell phone. This is a cell phone limita- phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
tion. differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
327
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try

switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having Possible device malfunc- cable.
trouble tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
connecting my
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
device.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a device-
dependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
Bluetooth audio The device is not player on your device.
does not connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad Try switching your device off, resetting it or
state. removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC 3 does information.
not recognize
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
music that is on
corrupted. version.
my device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
328
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
The file format is not Convert the file to a supported format. See
supported by SYNC 3. Entertainment (page 295).
The device needs to be Update media index. See Settings (page
re-indexed. 313).
The device has a lock Make sure your device is unlocked before
screen enabled. connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
When I connect to SYNC 3.
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media Connect a compatible device or media
song informa-
player is incompatible. player.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Issues
Failed connec- Password error. Verify password.

tion.
Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.
Multiple Access points Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
within range with the the default name unless it contains a
same SSID. unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
329
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Disconnecting Weak signal probably Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
after successful due to distance from the with the front of the vehicle facing the
connection. hotspot, obstruction or hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
high interference. possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interfer-
ence.
Poor signal seen There may be an If the vehicle is equipped with heated
by SYNC 3 obstruction between windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
despite being SYNC 3 and the hotspot. that the windshield is not facing the
near a hotspot. hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network. again.
of available
networks.
330
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
seen when currently provide a hotspot.
searching for hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Software down- Poor signal strength, too Check the signal quality (under network
load takes too far from the hotspot, details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
long. hotspot is supporting lent, test with another high-speed equipped
multiple connections, hotspot where the environment is more
slow Internet connection predictable.
or other problems.
SYNC 3 seems It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
to connect with no new software. The the hotspot requires a subscription, you
a hotspot and connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
the signal be a managed one and it
strength is requires either a
excellent but subscription or agreeing
the software is to the terms and condi-
not being tions.
updated.
331
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile Make sure you have a compatible smart-

Applications: phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
When I select an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
You did not connect an
"Find Mobile higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
Applink Compatible
Apps," SYNC 3 connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
phone to SYNC 3.
does not find find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
any applica- iPhone users must also connect to a USB
tions. port with an Apple USB cable.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
My phone is AppLink-enabled apps
is running on your phone. Some apps
connected, but I are not installed and
require you to register or login to the app
still cannot find running on your mobile
on the phone before using them with
any apps. device.
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
My phone is
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
connected, my the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and re-
app(s) are
open their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
running, but I then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
still cannot find
cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
any apps.
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
332
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
My Android There is a Bluetooth issue Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
phone is on some older versions it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
connected, my of the Android operating SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
app(s) are system that may cause connect to your phone if you press the
running, I apps that were found on "Phone" button.
restarted them, your previous vehicle
but I still cannot drive to not be found
find any apps. again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My iPhone is Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
connected, my a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
app is running, I You may need to reset to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
restarted the the USB connection to should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
app but I still SYNC 3. Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
cannot find it on and restart it.
SYNC 3.
I have an Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
Android phone. device by using the device's volume control
I found and buttons which are most often found on the
started my side of the device.
media app on The Bluetooth volume on
SYNC 3, but the phone may be low.
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Some Android devices Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
have a limited number of want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
I can only see
Bluetooth ports that SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
some of the
apps can use to connect. app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink apps
If you have more AppLink
running on my
apps on your phone than
phone listed in
the number of available
the SYNC 3
Bluetooth ports, you will
Mobile Apps
not see all of your apps
Menu.
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
333
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Review the cell phone voice commands

and the media voice commands at the
You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
not understand
voice session to find a list of voice
what I am
commands there.
saying.
You may be speaking too Wait for the system to prompt you before
soon or at the wrong you state your command.
time.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
Make sure you are saying the complete title
SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
not understand appears on your device.
Nettles".
the name of a
song or artist. If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
The song or artist name
may have some special Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
characters that are not and playlists names do not have any special
being recognized by characters like *, - or +.
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does exactly as it appears on your phone. For
the name exactly as it
not understand example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
appears on your phone-
or is calling the say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
book.
wrong contact is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
when I want to The contact name may
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
contain special charac-
have any special characters like *, - or +.
ters.
334
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation

The SYNC 3 rules of the selected language to the
voice control contact names stored on your cell phone.
system is having You may not be saying Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
trouble recog- the name exactly as it manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
nizing foreign appears on your phone- for phonebook and then contact name.
names stored book. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
on my cell 3 will read the contact name to you, giving
phone. you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
trouble recog- rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
nizing foreign stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
tracks, artists, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
albums, genres for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC 3.
and playlist U2) such that you can always use the
names from my English pronunciation for these artists.
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
The system voice.
generates voice
prompts and SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3 uses text-to- features for a wide range of languages.
the pronunci-
speech voice prompt Dialing a contact name directly from the
ation of some
technology. phonebook without pre-recording (for
words may not
be accurate for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
my language. track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
335
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
Personal Profiles have not been set up.

An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
I cannot create a profile.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
A different Personal Profile is active than
My personalized settings do not save.
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
336
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue Possible cause and solution
The keyfob being used is not linked to a

profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile Personal Profiles is turned off.
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
I lost a keyfob. Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
I lost all profiles. a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
337
SYNC™ 3
General
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
display does not
language for the instru- current active language.
match the
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
SYNC 3
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
language
display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3

troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
338
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
WARNINGS responsibility to make sure that any
Do not place objects or mount equipment an authorized dealer installs on
equipment on or near the airbag your vehicle complies with applicable local
cover, on the side of the seatbacks legislation and other requirements.
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
that may come into contact with a equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
instructions may increase the risk of must keep to the parameters in the
personal injury in the event of a crash. following table. We do not provide special
Do not fasten antenna cables to provisions or conditions for installations or
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and use.
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 10 cm from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Car
E239120
339
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
340
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
Note: After the installation of radio

frequency transmitters, check for END USER LICENSE
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
AGREEMENT
standby and transmit modes.
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
Check all electrical equipment: LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• With the ignition ON.
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
• With the engine running. have acquired a vehicle having several
• During a road test at various speeds. devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
Check that electromagnetic fields include software licensed or owned by
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
transmitter installed do not exceed ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
applicable human exposure requirements. software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
341
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") liable for any damages arising out of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY errors in the speech recognition
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE process. It is your responsibility to
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT monitor any speech recognition
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, functions included in the system.
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF Decompilation and Disassembly:
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). You may not reverse engineer,
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This decompile, translate, disassemble or
EULA grants you the following license: attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• You may use the SOFTWARE as SOFTWARE nor permit others to
installed on the DEVICES and as reverse engineer, decompile or
otherwise interfacing with systems disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and/or services provide by or through and only to the extent that such activity
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third is expressly permitted by applicable
party software and service providers. law notwithstanding this limitation or
Description of Other Rights and to the extent as may be permitted by
Limitations the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
• Speech Recognition: If the with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE includes speech • Limitations on Distributing,
recognition component(s), you should Copying, Modifying and Creating
understand that speech recognition is Derivative Works: You may not
an inherently statistical process and distribute, copy, make modifications
that recognition errors are inherent in to or create derivative works based on
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
342
Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may charges from your wireless service

permanently transfer your rights under provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
this EULA only as part of a sale or or third party software and services
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you suppliers provide or make available to
retain no copies, you transfer all of the you Supplemental Components and
SOFTWARE (including all component no other EULA terms are provided
parts, the media and printed materials, along with the Supplemental
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Components, then the terms of this
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
recipient agrees to the terms of this COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, designated agent reserve the right to
any transfer must include all prior discontinue without liability any
versions of the SOFTWARE. Internet-based services provided to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any you or made available to you through
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY the use of the SOFTWARE.
may terminate this EULA if you fail to • Links to Third Party Sites: The
comply with the terms and conditions SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of this EULA. ability to link to third party sites. The
• Internet-Based Services third party sites are not under the
Components: The SOFTWARE may control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
contain components that enable and its affiliates and/or its designated
facilitate the use of certain agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
Internet-based services. You COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
acknowledge and agree that FORD designated agent are responsible for
MOTOR COMPANY, third party (I) the contents of any third party sites,
software and service suppliers, its any links contained in third party sites,
affiliates and/or its designated agent or any changes or updates to third
may automatically check the version party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
of the SOFTWARE and/or its other form of transmission received
components that you are utilizing and from any third party sites. If the
may provide upgrades or supplements SOFTWARE provides links to third
to the SOFTWARE that may be party sites, those links are provided to
automatically downloaded to your you only as a convenience, and the
DEVICES. inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
• Additional Software/Services: The FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR and/or its designated agent.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
its designated agent to provide or make You recognize your obligation to drive
available to you SOFTWARE updates, responsibly and keep attention on the
supplements, add-on components, or road. You will read and abide with the
Internet-based services components DEVICES operating instructions
of the SOFTWARE after the date you particularly as they pertain to safety
obtain your initial copy of the and you agree to assume any risk
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental associated with the use of the
Components".) SOFTWARE updates DEVICES.
may cause you to incur additional
343
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You

If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the subject to U.S. and European Union export
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or applicable international and national laws
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
replacement copy for the existing other governments.
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
this EULA, including any additional EULA you any rights in connection with any
terms accompanying the upgrade trademarks or service marks of FORD
SOFTWARE. MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: party software and service providers.
All title and intellectual property rights in PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
limited to any images, photographs, provided in the documentation for the
animations, video, audio, music, text and DEVICES product support, such as the
"applets" incorporated into the vehicle owner guide.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the Should you have any questions concerning
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may please refer to the address provided in the
not copy the printed materials documentation for the DEVICES.
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title No Liability for Certain Damages:
and intellectual property rights in and to EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
the content which may be accessed MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
through use of the SOFTWARE is the SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
property of the respective content owner AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
and may be protected by applicable LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
copyright or other intellectual property CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
rights to use such content outside its CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
intended use. All rights not specifically PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
granted under this EULA are reserved by LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
and third party software and service PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
services which may be accessed through EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the VEHICLE.
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
344
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation

Information Read and follow features may require manual
instructions: (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
• Before using your SYNC® system, read while driving can distract your attention
and follow all instructions and safety and could cause an accident or other
information provided in this end user serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not and legal manner before attempting
following precautions found in the these operations.
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries. • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
General Operation as an aid. Make your driving decisions
• Voice Command Control: Certain based on your observations of local
functions within the SYNC® system conditions and existing traffic
may be accomplished using voice regulations. Any such feature is not a
commands. Using voice commands substitute for your personal judgment.
while driving helps you to operate the Any route suggestions made by this
system without removing your hands system should never replace any local
from the wheel or eyes from the road. traffic regulations or your personal
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not judgment or knowledge of safe driving
access any function requiring a practices.
prolonged view of the screen while you • Route Safety: Do not follow the route
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal suggestions if doing so would result in
manner before attempting to access a an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
function of the system requiring would be placed in an unsafe situation,
prolonged attention. or if you would be directed into an area
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the that you consider unsafe. The driver is
volume excessively. Keep the volume ultimately responsible for the safe
at a level where you can still hear operation of the vehicle and therefore,
outside traffic and emergency signals must evaluate whether it is safe to
while driving. Driving while unable to follow the suggested directions.
hear these sounds could cause an • Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
accident. used by this system may be inaccurate
• Navigation Features: Any navigation because of changes in roads, traffic
features included in the system are controls or driving conditions. Always
intended to provide turn by turn use good judgment and common sense
instructions to get you to a desired when following the suggested routes.
destination. Please make certain all • Emergency Services: Do not rely on
persons using this system carefully any navigation features included in the
read and follow instructions and safety system to route you to emergency
information fully. services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
345
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Disclaimer of Warranty

Risk
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
• You agree to each of the following:(a) AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
Any use of the SOFTWARE while SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
driving an automobile or other vehicle THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
in violation of applicable law or SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
presents a significant risk of distracted ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
driving and should not be attempted TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
under any circumstances;(b) Use of BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
poses a significant risk of hearing THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
damage and should not be attempted "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
under any circumstances;(c) The FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
SOFTWARE may not be compatible ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
with new or different versions of an HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
operating system, third party software, AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
or third party services, and the THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
critical failure of an operating system, SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
third party software, or third party STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
service.(d) Any third party service LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
accessed by or third party software AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
charge an additional fee for access, (ii) QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
may not work correctly, on an ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
may change streaming formats or NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
adult, profane or offensive content; and NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
misleading traffic, weather, financial OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
or safety information or other content; SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
cause you to incur additional charges SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
from your wireless service provider WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
(WSP) and any data or minute THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
calculators that may be included in the SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
software program are for reference OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
only, are not warranted in any way and UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
should not be relied upon in anyway. OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
to be responsible for and assume the THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
entire risk to the items set forth in CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
Section (a) – (e) above. INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
346
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE Binding Arbitration and Class Action

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, Waiver
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE (a) Application. This Section applies to
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR controversy between You and FORD
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING exceptions listed above, concerning the
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE legal or equitable basis.
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
• The laws of the State of Michigan which is a written statement of the name,
govern this EULA and Your use of the address, and contact information of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to dispute, and the relief requested. You and
other local, state, national, or FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
international laws. Any litigation arising resolve any dispute through informal
out of or related to this EULA shall be negotiation within 60 days from the date
brought and maintained exclusively in the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
a court of the State of Michigan You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
located in Wayne County or in the commence arbitration.
United States District Court for the (c) Small claims court. You may also
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby litigate any dispute in small claims court
consent to submit to the personal in your county of residence or FORD
jurisdiction of a court in the State of MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
Michigan located in Wayne County and business, if the dispute meets all
the United States District Court for the requirements to be heard in the small
Eastern District of Michigan for any claims court. You may litigate in small
dispute arising out of or relating to this claims court whether or not You
EULA. negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
347
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a may award the same damages to You
party or class member) all disputes in court individually as a court could. The arbitrator
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes may award declaratory or injunctive relief
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, only to You individually, and only to the
whose decision will be final except for a extent required to satisfy Your individual
limited right of appeal under the Federal claim.
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award. • I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
forum will be conducted solely on an
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
COMPANY’S last written settlement
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
offer made before the arbitrator was
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
appointed (“last written offer”), your
attorney general action, or in any other
dispute goes all the way to an
proceeding in which any party acts or
arbitrator’s decision (called an
proposes to act in a representative
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
you more than the last written offer,
be combined with another without the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
prior written consent of all parties to all
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
arbitration will be conducted by the (3) reimburse any expenses (including
American Arbitration Association (the expert witness fees and costs) that
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration your attorney reasonably accrues for
Rules. If You are an individual and use the investigating, preparing, and pursuing
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or will determine the amounts.
less whether or not You are an individual • ii. Disputes involving more than
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA $75,000. The AAA rules will govern
Supplementary Procedures for payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
Consumer-Related Disputes will also and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for • iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may any arbitration you commence, FORD
request a telephonic or in-person hearing MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
good cause to hold an in-person hearing or brought for an improper purpose. In
instead. For more information, see adr.org any arbitration FORD MOTOR
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to COMPANY commences, it will pay all
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
348
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and 1. Safe and Lawful Use
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any You acknowledge that devoting attention
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
counted in determining how much a of injury or death to you and others in
dispute involves. situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed agree to comply with the following when
within one year. To the extent permitted using the TeleNav Software:
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
be filed within one year in small claims drive safely;
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section (b) use your own personal judgment while
d). The one-year period begins when the driving. If you feel that a route suggested
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
a claim or dispute is not filed within one perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
year, it is permanently barred. places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver you into an area that you consider to be
(Section e) is found to be illegal or unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
dispute, then that portion of Section e will manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
not apply to those parts. Instead, those your vehicle is stationary and parked;
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
or in any manner inconsistent with this
unenforceable, that provision will be
Agreement;
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect. (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software End User License TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
Agreement your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
Please read these terms and conditions
operation of any safety device (such as an
carefully before you use the TeleNav
airbag).
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
terms and conditions. If you do not accept harmless against all claims resulting from
these terms and conditions, do not break any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
the seal of the package, launch, or use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
otherwise use the TeleNav Software. vehicle, including as a result of your failure
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and to comply with the directions above.
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
349
Appendices
2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise

transfer the TeleNav Software to
You agree: (a) when registering the others, except as part of your
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with permanent transfer of the TeleNav
true, accurate, current, and complete Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
information about yourself, and (b) to Software in any manner that
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true, I. infringes the intellectual property or
accurate, current and complete. proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
3. Software License
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
• Subject to your compliance with the regulation, including but not limited to laws
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav and regulations related to spamming,
hereby grants to you a personal, privacy, consumer and child protection,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license obscenity or defamation, or
(except as expressly permitted below iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
in connection with your permanent harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
transfer of the TeleNav Software obscene, libelous, or otherwise
license), without the right to objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
sublicense, to use the TeleNav otherwise permit unauthorized access by
Software (in object code form only) in third parties to the TeleNav Software
order to access and use the TeleNav without advanced written permission of
Software. This license shall terminate TeleNav.
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will 4. Disclaimers
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, • To the fullest extent permissible
and not to provide commercial pursuant to applicable law, in no event
navigation services to other parties. will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
3.1 License Limitations foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile, else in reliance on the information
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
provided by the TeleNav Software.
or otherwise change the TeleNav
TeleNav also does not warrant the
Software or any part thereof; (b)
accuracy of the map or other data used
attempt to derive the source code,
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
audio library or structure of the
may not always reflect reality due to,
TeleNav Software without the prior
among other things, road closures,
express written consent of TeleNav;
construction, weather, new roads and
(c) remove from the TeleNav
other changing conditions. You are
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
responsible for the entire risk arising
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
out of your use of the TeleNav
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
Software. For example but without
other notices or markings; (d)
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
350
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,

navigation, as the maps or functionality WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
of the TeleNav Software are not REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
intended to support such high risk DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
applications, especially in more remote CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
geographical areas. NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV • You agree that any dispute, claim or
SOFTWARE. controversy arising out of or relating to
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the this Agreement or the TeleNav
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this Software shall be settled by
limitation may not apply to you. independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
5. Limitation of Liability the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER The arbitrator shall apply the
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV American Arbitration Association, and
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS the judgment upon the award rendered
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD by the arbitrator may be entered by any
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, court having jurisdiction. Note that
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES proceeding and the decision of the
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT arbitrator shall be binding upon both
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE parties. You expressly agree to waive
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, and performance hereunder will be
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF governed by and construed in
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION accordance with the laws of the State
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE of California, without giving effect to
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE its conflict of law provisions. To the
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF extent judicial action is necessary in
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE connection with the binding arbitration,
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. both TeleNav and you agree to submit
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
351
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the conferred by implication, statute,

courts of the County of Santa Clara, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
California. The United Nations TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
Convention on Contracts for the hereby reserve all of their respective rights
International Sale of Goods shall not other than the licenses explicitly granted
apply. in this Agreement.
7. Assignment 8.3
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer By using the TeleNav Software, you
this Agreement or any of your rights or consent to receive from TeleNav all
obligations, except in totality, in communications, including notices,
connection with your permanent agreements, legally required disclosures
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and or other information in connection with the
expressly conditioned upon the new TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing electronically. TeleNav may provide such
to be bound by the terms and Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
conditions of this Agreement. Any such Website or by downloading such Notices
sale, assignment or transfer that is not to your wireless device. If you desire to
expressly permitted under this withdraw your consent to receive Notices
paragraph will result in immediate electronically, you must discontinue your
termination of this Agreement, without use of the TeleNav Software.
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately 8.4
cease all use of the TeleNav Software. TeleNav's or your failure to require
Notwithstanding the foregoing, performance of any provision shall not
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to affect that party's right to require
any other party at any time without performance at any time thereafter, nor
notice, provided the assignee remains shall a waiver of any breach or default of
bound by this Agreement. this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
8. Miscellaneous subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.1
8.5
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with If any provision herein is held
respect to the subject matter hereof. unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
8.2 parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
Except for the limited licenses expressly effect.
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
352
Appendices
8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from

the United States Postal Service® to
The headings in this Agreement are for
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, ©United States Postal Service® 2014.
and will not be referred to in connection Prices are not established, controlled or
with the construction or interpretation of approved by the United States Postal
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, Service®. The following trademarks and
the words "include" and "including" and registrations are owned by the USPS:
variations thereof, will not be deemed to United States Postal Service, USPS, and
be terms of limitation, but rather will be ZIP+4
deemed to be followed by the words The Data for Mexico includes certain data
"without limitation". from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions Geografía.
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
other data licensed to Telenav by third (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
party vendors for the benefit of you and The data (“Data”) is provided for your
other end users. This Agreement personal, internal use only and not for
includes end-user terms applicable to resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
these companies (included at the end subject to the following terms and
of this Agreement), and thus your use conditions which are agreed to by you, on
of the Telenav Software is also subject the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
to such terms. You agree to comply Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
with the following additional terms and their licensors and suppliers) on the other
conditions, which are applicable to hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
Terms and Conditions
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
The data (“Data”) is provided for your for the internal business and personal
personal, internal use only and not for purposes for which you were licensed, and
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is not for service bureau, time-sharing or
subject to the following terms and other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
conditions which are agreed to by you, on subject to the restrictions set forth in the
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and following paragraphs, you agree not to
its licensors (including their licensors and otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
suppliers) on the other hand. decompile, disassemble, create any
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
The Data for areas of Canada includes or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
information taken with permission from except to the extent permitted by
Canadian authorities, including: © Her mandatory laws.
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
353
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
and without limiting the preceding Territories and Countries do not allow
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) certain warranty exclusions, so to that
with any products, systems, or applications extent the above exclusion may not apply
installed or otherwise connected to or in to you.
communication with vehicles, capable of Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
real time route guidance, fleet LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
management or similar applications; or (b) BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
with or in communication with any CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
positioning devices or any mobile or IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
wireless-connected electronic or computer CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
devices, including without limitation ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
computers, pagers, and personal digital MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
assistants or PDAs. POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
Warning. The Data may contain FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
inaccurate or incomplete information due CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
to the passage of time, changing OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
circumstances, sources used and the SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
nature of collecting comprehensive ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
geographic data, any of which may lead to INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
incorrect results. ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
guarantees, representations or warranties LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
of any kind, express or implied, arising by POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
law or otherwise, including but not limited States, Territories and Countries do not
to, content, quality, accuracy, allow certain liability exclusions or
completeness, effectiveness, reliability, damages limitations, so to that extent the
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, above may not apply to you.
use or results to be obtained from this Export Control. You shall not export from
Data, or that the Data or server will be anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
uninterrupted or error-free. product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
required under, applicable export laws,
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
rules and regulations, including but not
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
administered by the Office of Foreign
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
354
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

HERE from complying with any of its NOTICE OF USE
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
excused and shall not constitute a breach SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. These terms and SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
conditions constitute the entire agreement West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
between Telenav (and its licensors, 60606
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, This Data is a commercial item as
and supersedes in their entirety any and defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
all written or oral agreements previously these End-User Terms under which this
existing between us with respect to such Data was provided.
subject matter.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws If the Contracting Officer, federal
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” government agency, or any federal official
where European HERE Data is used], refuses to use the legend provided herein,
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of the Contracting Officer, federal
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations government agency, or any federal official
Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European I. US/Canada Territory
HERE Data is used] for any and all A. United States Data. The End-User
disputes, claims and actions arising from Terms for any Application containing
or in connection with the Data provided to Data for the United States shall contain
you hereunder. the following notices:
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the “HERE holds a non-exclusive license
United States government or any other from the United States Postal
entity seeking or applying rights similar to Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
those customarily claimed by the United information.”
States government, this Data is a “©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined 20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms, States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
355
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
356
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO
and their officers, employees and tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
agents from and against any claim, ARGENTINO”
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
demand or action, alleging loss, MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
costs, expenses, damages or injuries AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
(including injuries resulting in death) 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
arising out of the use or possession ENERO DE 2011”
of the data or the Data. “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi- Guade-
tion to all of the rights and obligations loupe,
of the parties under the Agreement. French
To the extent that any of the provi- Guiana
sions of this Section are inconsistent and
with, or conflict with, any other provi- Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
sions of the Agreement, the provisions nique Nacional de Estadística y
of this Section shall prevail. Mexico Geografía)”
IV. Middle East Territory
357
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, Client only after receiving certification
HERE shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
358
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich-

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; und Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung
limitation, Landervermessungämter of der zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Survey data © Crown
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- copyright and database
swesen of Austria, and the National right 2010 Contains Royal
Land Survey of Sweden. Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting right 2010”
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-
a direct action against Client to enforce Map Ltd.”
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
map requirements (see Section IV(B) stata prodotta usando
above) contained in this Agreement. quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies al tratto prodotta e fornita
of the Data and/or packaging relating dalla Regione Toscana.”
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used Norway “Copyright © 2000;
as described below corresponding to Norwegian Mapping
the Territory (or portion thereof) Authority”
included in such copy:
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
Country(ies) Notice
359
Appendices
Spain “Información geográfica Product incorporates data which is ©

propiedad del CNIG” 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Sweden “Based upon electronic Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.” B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Switzerland “Topografische Terms for any Application containing
Grundlage: © Bundesamt RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
für Landestopographie. shall contain the following notice:
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client “Product incorporates traffic location
acknowledges that HERE has not codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
received approvals to distribute map tion Limited and its licensors.”
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. Telematics Disclosure
HERE may update such list from time to
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
time. The license rights granted to Client
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
under this TL with respect to the Data
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
for such countries are contingent upon
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
Client’s compliance with all applicable
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
laws and regulations, including, without
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
limitation, any required licenses or
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
approvals to distribute the Application
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
incorporating such Data in such
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
respective countries.
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
VI. Australia Territory CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
of the Data and/or packaging relating PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
thereto shall include the respective Third AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
Party Notices set forth below and used UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
as described below corresponding to UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
the Territory (or portion thereof) UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
included in such copy: EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
Copyright. Based on data provided KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
under license from PSMA Australia REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
Limited (www.psma.com.au). ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
360
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR

HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
DEVICE. TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE CARRIER.
SERVICES
VII. China Territory
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL Personal Use Only
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END You agree to use this Data together with
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE [insert name of Client Application] for the
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT solely personal, non-commercial purposes
GUARANTEE ANY END USER for which you were licensed, and not for
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR service bureau, time-sharing or other
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS to the restrictions set forth in the following
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER as necessary for your personal use to (i)
361
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you rigCustomer Remedies
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
and may not transfer or distribute it in any the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
form, for any purpose, except to the extent Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
permitted by mandatory laws. with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
Restrictions resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
Except where you have been specifically be warranted for the remainder of the
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
not (a) use this Data with any products, nor any product support services offered
systems, or applications installed or by NAV2 are available without proof of
otherwise connected to or in purchase from an authorized international
communication with vehicles, capable of source.
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet No Other Warranty:
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
positioning devices or any mobile or SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
wireless-connected electronic or computer PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
devices, including without limitation AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
computers, pagers, and personal digital ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
using this Data if you fail to comply with MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
these terms and conditions. PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
Limited Warranty exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusion may not apply to you.
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a Limited Liability:
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
described in applicable written materials LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
support engineers will make commercially BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
reasonable efforts to solve any problem CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
issues. IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
362
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, Governing Law.

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The above terms and conditions shall be
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES governed by the laws of the People’s
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Republic of China, without giving effect to
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR United Nations Convention for Contracts
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR for the International Sale of Goods, which
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A from or in connection with the Data
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS provided to you hereunder shall be
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE submitted to the Shanghai International
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER Economic and Trade Arbitration
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR Commission for arbitration.
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER Gracenote® Copyright
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under CD and music-related data from
applicable law, so to that extent the above Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
exclusion may not apply to you.
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Export Control Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
You agree not to export to anywhere any practice one or more of the following U.S.
part of the Data provided to you or any Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
direct product thereof except in 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
compliance with, and with all licenses and 6,330,593 and other patents issued or
approvals required under, applicable pending. Some services supplied under
export laws, rules and regulations. license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
IP Protection
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
suppliers and are protected by applicable logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
copyright and other intellectual property Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
law and treaties. The Data are provided Gracenote.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
Entire Agreement
This device contains software from
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
entire agreement between NAV2(and its Emeryville, California 94608
licensors, including their licensors and ("Gracenote").
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their The software from Gracenote (the
entirety any and all written or oral "Gracenote Software") enables this device
agreements previously existing between to do disc and music file identification and
us with respect to such subject matter. obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
363
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform including any copyrighted material or

other functions. You may use Gracenote music file information. You agree that
Data only by means of the intended End Gracenote may enforce its respective
User functions of this device. This device rights, collectively or separately, under this
may contain content belonging to agreement against you, directly in each
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the company's own name.
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
queries for statistical purposes. The
content and such content providers shall
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
be entitled to all of the benefits and
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
protections set forth herein that are
queries without knowing anything about
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
who you are. For more information, see the
will use the content from Gracenote
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
non-commercial use only. You agree not OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
associated with a music file) to any third WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
HEREIN. TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
Gracenote Servers.
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Gracenote Content, including all ownership OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
rights. Under no circumstances will either ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
Gracenote become liable for any payment THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
to you for any information that you provide, PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
364
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Taiwan Territory

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Note: In accordance with the management
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
approach of low-power radio wave
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
radiation motors:
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE Article 12: For approved and certified
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY low-power radiation motor models,
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL companies, firms or users must not alter
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY the frequency, increase the power or
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL change the characteristics and functions
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS of the original design without authorization.
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON Article 14: The usage of low-power
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. radio-frequency motors must not affect
Radio Frequency Statement aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L be detected, immediately stop using the
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
This device complies with Part 15 of the interference. For the legal
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry telecommunication and wireless
Canada. Operation is subject to the telecommunication of the telco, the
following two conditions: low-power radio frequency motor must be
(1) This device may not cause harmful able to tolerate legal limits of interference
interference, and from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
interference that may cause undesired AND CONDITIONS
operation.
By activating, using and/or accessing the
WARNING SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
Changes or modifications not other content or material provided by
expressively approved by the party Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
responsible for compliance could and/or Services), you must accept
void the user's authority to operate the certain terms and conditions. The following
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio is a brief summary of the terms and
certification number only signifies that conditions that apply to you. To view the
Industry Canada technical specifications full terms and conditions relevant to your
were met. use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
The antenna used for this transmitter must
Website
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
transmitter. ditions/
1. Acceptance
365
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, 5. Service Continuity and Reception of

you will be deemed to have accepted and the SUNA Traffic Channel
agreed to be bound by the terms and
We will use reasonable endeavours to
conditions fully detailed at:
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Website Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
maintenance. We will try to perform
ditions/
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services at any
SUNA Products and/or Services are for time.
your personal use. You may not record, or Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
retransmit the content, nor use the content reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
in association with any other traffic RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You 6. Limitation of Liability
obtain no right of ownership in any Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
Intellectual Property Rights (including the manufacturer of your device (the
copyright) in the data that is used to “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. any third party for any damages either
3. Appropriate Use direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
SUNA Products and/or Services are inability to use SUNA Products and/or
intended as an aid to personal motoring Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
and travel planning, and do not provide has been advised of the possibility of such
comprehensive or accurate information on damages. You also acknowledge that the
all occasions. On occasions, you may neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
experience additional delay as a result of guarantees nor make any warranties that
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You relate to the availability, accuracy or
acknowledge that it is not intended, or completeness of SUNA Products and/or
suitable, for use in applications where time Services, and to the extent which it is
of arrival or driving directions may impact lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
the safety of the public or yourself. Supplier excludes any warranties which
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services might otherwise be implied by any State
while driving or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or 7. Please Note
Services are available or installed and Great care has been taken in preparing this
active, remain at all times responsible for manual. Constant product development
observing all relevant laws and codes of may mean that some information is not
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only entirely up-to-date. The information in this
actively operate SUNA Products and/or document is subject to change without
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete notice.
stop and it is safe to do so.
366
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s) E253824
Ghana
E253823
E207816 Jordan
Argentina
E253822
Malaysia
E253812
E197509
Brazil
E253813
Mexico
E207818
European Union EU
E197811
367
Appendices
Moldova
E197844
E207821 Serbia
Morocco
E253820
E253817
Singapore
Oman
E198002
E198001 South Africa

Philippines
E253819
E253816
South Korea
Russia
368
Appendices

Logos for Mid Range Radar
E203679
Taiwan
E269659
Argentina
E253818
Ukraine
E269662
E207817 Ghana
United Arab Emirates
E269660
Jordan
369
Appendices

Logos for Passive Anti-Theft
System
E269661
Morocco
E274065
Argentina
E269664
South Africa
E269675
Brazil
E269663
E274068
Djibouti
370
Appendices
E269674 E269673
Ghana Malaysia
E274067 E269670
Jamaica Morocco
E269666 E274066
Jordan Paraguay
371
Appendices
E275754 E269667
Pakistan South Africa
E269672 E269671
Serbia Ukraine
E269676 E269668
Singapore United Arab Emirates
372
Appendices
E269677 E272194
Vietnam Jordan

Logos for Radio Transceiver
Module
E269683
Morocco
E272192
Djibouti
E269684
Pakistan
E272193
Jamaica
373
Appendices
E272195 E269682
Paraguay Ukraine
E269681 E272196
Serbia United Arab Emirates

Logos for Blind Spot Information
System
E269685
South Africa
E269695
Ghana
374
Appendices
E269697 E269693
Malaysia Vietnam

Logos for Wireless Charging
E269696
South Africa
E272903
E269694

E273475
South Korea
375
Appendices

Logos for SYNC 3
E252722
Brazil
376
Index
4 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............75

Door Ajar..................................................................75
4WD Front and Rear Park Aid.....................................76
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................136 Headlamps On......................................................75
Key in Ignition.........................................................75
A Lane Departure Warning...................................76
Parking Brake On..................................................75
A/C Seatbelt Reminder...............................................75
See: Climate Control..........................................98 Audio Control..................................................48
About This Manual...........................................7 Audio Input Jack............................................281
ABS Audio System................................................278
See: Brakes...........................................................138 General Information..........................................278
ABS driving hints Audio Troubleshooting..............................282
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Audio Unit.......................................................279
Brakes................................................................138 CD Eject................................................................280
Accessories CD Slot..................................................................280
See: Replacement Parts Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.................280
Recommendation............................................10 Tune........................................................................280
ACC Volume and Power...........................................280
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............157 Autolamps........................................................55
Active Park Assist.........................................148 Windshield Wiper Activated
Automatic Steering into Parking Headlamps........................................................55
Space.................................................................150 Automatic Climate Control......................100
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...........151 A/C............................................................................101
Troubleshooting the System...........................151 Auto..........................................................................101
Using Active Park Assist...................................149 Defrost.....................................................................101
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................48 Fan Speed Control.............................................100
Air Conditioning Heated Rear Window.........................................101
See: Climate Control..........................................98 Heated Seats........................................................101
Air Filter Heated Windshield.............................................101
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............236 Left-hand Temperature Control...................100
Alarm Max A/C..................................................................101
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................46 Max Defrost...........................................................101
Ambient Lighting...........................................60 Power.......................................................................101
Adjusting the Intensity........................................61 Recirculated Air....................................................101
Changing the Color...............................................61 Right-hand Temperature Control................100
Switching Ambient Lighting Off......................61 Automatic High Beam Control.................56
Switching Ambient Lighting On.......................61 Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................57
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................46 Switching the System On and Off.................57
Alarm System........................................................46 Automatic Transmission...........................130
Arming the Alarm.................................................47 Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Disarming the Alarm...........................................47 Learning.............................................................135
Full and Reduced Guard....................................47 Emergency Park Position Release
Triggering the Alarm............................................47 Lever....................................................................133
Appendices....................................................339 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Apps...................................................................312 Snow...................................................................135
....................................................................................312 Progressive Range Selection - 10 Speed
At a Glance........................................................12 only......................................................................133
377
Index
SelectShift™ Automatic Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L

Transmission....................................................132 TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
Transmission Selector Lever Positions - 6 (YM)...............................................................267
Speed..................................................................131 Capacities.............................................................267
Auto-Start-Stop - Automatic Specifications.....................................................268
Transmission...............................................124 Capacities and Specifications - 2.2L
Principle of Operation.......................................124 Diesel............................................................269
Replacing the Battery........................................125 Capacities.............................................................270
Switching the System On and Off................125 Specifications.....................................................270
Using Auto-Start-Stop.....................................124 Capacities and Specifications - 3.2L
Autowipers.........................................................51 Diesel.............................................................272
Autowipers Settings............................................52 Capacities.............................................................272
Auxiliary Power Points..................................117 Specifications......................................................273
12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................117 Capacities and Specifications................258
230 Volt AC Power Point...................................117 Car Wash
Location...................................................................117 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................237
Center Console...............................................119
B Changing a Bulb............................................231
Approach Lamp and Side Repeater...........233
Battery Front Fog Lamps................................................233
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................228 Lamp Assembly Condensation.....................231
Blind Spot Information System...............173 Replacing a Reverse Lamp Bulb..................235
....................................................................................173 Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs....................232
Switching the System On and Off................174 Replacing the License Plate Lamp
System Errors........................................................174 Bulb....................................................................235
Using the Blind Spot Information Replacing the Rear Fog Lamp Bulb............235
System...............................................................173 Replacing the Tail, Brake and Turn Signal
BLIS Lamp Bulbs.....................................................234
See: Blind Spot Information System...........173 Side Repeater......................................................233
Bonnet Lock Changing a Fuse...........................................216
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........218 Fuses.......................................................................216
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................226 Changing a Road Wheel............................251
Brakes...............................................................138 Installing a Road Wheel..................................255
General Information..........................................138 Jacking and Lifting Points...............................253
Breaking-In.....................................................190 Lug Nuts.................................................................251
Brakes and Clutch..............................................190 Removing a Road Wheel................................254
Engine.....................................................................190 Spare Wheel........................................................253
Tires.........................................................................190 Stowing the Flat Tire........................................256
Bulb Specification Chart...........................274 Vehicle Jack...........................................................251
Changing the 12V Battery.........................228
C Remove and Reinstall the Battery..............229
Changing the Engine Air Filter................236
Cabin Air Filter................................................107 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................230
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L Changing the Rear Window Wiper
TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) Blade.................................................................230
(YN) , 2.0L Diesel......................................265 Changing the Windshield Wiper
Capacities.............................................................265 Blades...............................................................230
Specifications.....................................................266 Checking MyKey System Status...............37
378
Index
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................230

Child Restraint Positioning..........................19
D
Child Safety.......................................................15 Data Recording..................................................9
General Information.............................................15 Daytime Running Lamps............................56
Child Safety Locks...........................................21 Direction Indicators.......................................58
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................239 Doors and Locks.............................................39
Cleaning the Exterior...................................237 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.0L
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts......................237 TDCi Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS)
Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................237 (YN) /2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................237 PS) (YM), 2.0L Diesel..............................227
Underbody............................................................237 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 2.2L
Using a Car Wash...............................................237 Diesel/3.2L Diesel.....................................227
Cleaning the Interior...................................238 Driver Airbag.....................................................26
Fabric, Carpets, Cloth Seats, Headliners Driver Alert.......................................................167
and Floor Mats...............................................238 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................167
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................168
and Radio Screens.......................................239 Driver Knee Airbag..........................................27
Leather Interior...................................................238 Driving Aids.....................................................163
Rear Windows.....................................................239 Driving Hints...................................................190
Seatbelts...............................................................238 Driving Through Water................................195
Storage Compartments and Cup DRL
Holders.............................................................239 See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................56
Suede Micro Fiber Fabric................................238
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................237
E
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................36 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............339
Climate...........................................................300 Electronic Locking Differential.................137
Climate Control..............................................98 Activating the Electronic Locking
Clock...................................................................83 Differential........................................................137
Cold Weather Precautions........................195 End User License Agreement...................341
Coolant Check VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
See: Engine Coolant Check............................225 AGREEMENT (EULA) ..................................341
Creating a MyKey............................................35 Engine Coolant Check................................225
Programming/Changing Configurable Adding Engine Coolant....................................225
Settings...............................................................35 Engine Immobilizer
Cross Traffic Alert..........................................175 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................46
Blocked Sensors..................................................176 Engine Oil Check..........................................224
Switching the System Off and On................177 Adding Oil.............................................................224
System Errors........................................................177 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L TDCi Bi-Turbo
System Lights, Messages and Audible Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN) /2.0L
Alerts...................................................................176 TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
System Limitations.............................................177 (YM)...............................................................224
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System...........175 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Diesel/3.2L
Cruise Control..................................................49 Diesel.............................................................224
Principle of Operation.......................................156 Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi
Cruise control Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN)
See: Using Cruise Control................................156 .........................................................................258
379
Index
Engine Specifications - 2.0L TDCi Diesel Long-Term Storage............................................127

(132 kW/180 PS) (YM)...........................259 Winter Driving.......................................................127
Engine Specifications - 2.2L Fuel Shutoff....................................................197
Diesel............................................................260 Fuse Box Locations.....................................202
Engine Specifications - 3.2L Diesel........261 Engine Compartment Fuse Box (Power
Entertainment..............................................295 Distribution Box - PDB)..............................202
Apps.......................................................................300 Fuse Box Locations...........................................202
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................298 Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........203
CD............................................................................298 Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................202
DAB+/AM/FM/ Radio.......................................297 Fuses................................................................202
Sources..................................................................297 Fuse Specification Chart..........................203
Supported Media Players, Formats and Battery Mounted Fuse Link..............................211
Metadata Information................................300 Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................203
USB Ports.............................................................300 High Current Fuse Box.......................................212
Event Data Recording Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............212
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Exterior Mirrors................................................65
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................66
G
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................66 Gauges...............................................................69
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................66 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............70
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................65 Fuel Gauge...............................................................71
Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................66 Information Display.............................................70
Puddle Lamps ......................................................66 M0 Cluster..............................................................69
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................66 M2 Cluster...............................................................70
Gearbox
F See: Transmission..............................................130
General Information on Radio
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................22 Frequencies...................................................29
Front Seats..............................................................23 Global Opening and Closing......................65
Second-Row Seats..............................................23 Closing the Windows..........................................65
Third-Row Seats...................................................23 Opening the Windows.......................................65
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................24 Glove Box..........................................................119
Fire Extinguisher............................................197 Glove Box with Lock...........................................119
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................251
Floor Mats.......................................................195
H
Fog Lamps - Front Handbrake
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................57 See: Parking Brake.............................................139
Fog Lamps - Rear Hazard Flashers.............................................197
See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................58 Headlamp Leveling - Vehicles With:
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................136 Automatic Headlamp Leveling..............58
Principle of Operation.......................................136 Headlamp Leveling - Vehicles With:
Front Fog Lamps.............................................57 Manual Headlamp Leveling....................58
Front Parking Aid...........................................147 Headlamp Removal
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................148 See: Removing a Headlamp...........................231
Fuel and Refueling.......................................126 Headrest
Fuel Quality.....................................................126 See: Head Restraints........................................108
Biodiesel Usage...................................................127
380
Index
Head Restraints............................................108 AWD..........................................................................89

Adjusting the Head Restraint........................109 Battery and Charging System.........................90
Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................106 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Heated Rear Window.................................106 Alert System.....................................................90
Heated Seats..................................................116 Doors and Locks....................................................91
Heating Driver Alert...............................................................91
See: Climate Control..........................................98 Fuel.............................................................................91
Hill Descent Control....................................144 Hill Descent Control............................................92
Principle of Operation.......................................144 Hill Start Assist......................................................91
Hill Start Assist..............................................139 Keys and Keyless Entry......................................92
Enable and Disable the System...................140 Lane Keeping System.........................................93
Switching the System On and Off...............140 Maintenance..........................................................93
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................140 Park Aid....................................................................94
Hints on Controlling the Interior Park Brake...............................................................94
Climate..........................................................102 Power Steering......................................................95
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Powertrain..............................................................95
Weather............................................................104 Starting System ...................................................95
General Hints.......................................................102 Terrain Management System..........................96
Quickly Cooling the Interior............................103 Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................96
Quickly Heating the Interior............................102 Transmission..........................................................97
Recommended Settings for Cooling..........103 Installing Child Restraints............................16
Recommended Settings for Heating..........103 Attaching a Child Restraint with Top
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Tethers.................................................................18
Brakes............................................................138 Booster Seats..........................................................17
Home Screen................................................288 Child Restraints for Different Mass
Hood Lock Groups..................................................................16
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........218 ISOFIX Anchor Points..........................................18
Top Tether Anchor Points..................................18
I Instrument Cluster........................................69
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................55
Ignition Switch...............................................120 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps.....................56
Starting the Engine..............................................121 Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps..............56
Switching the Ignition Off...............................120 Instrument Panel Overview.........................12
Switching the Ignition On................................120 Left-hand drive.......................................................13
Switching the Ignition to Accessory Right-hand drive....................................................12
Mode..................................................................120 Interior Lamps.................................................59
Information Display Control......................49 Cargo Compartment Lamp.............................60
Information Displays......................................77 Front Interior Lamps...........................................59
General Information.............................................77 Glove Box Lamp...................................................60
Information Messages.................................85 Rear Interior Lamps............................................60
4WD..........................................................................85 Interior Mirror....................................................67
Active Park..............................................................86 Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................67
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................86 Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................67
AdBlue Level...........................................................87 Introduction.........................................................7
AdBlue System Malfunction............................87
Airbag.......................................................................88
Alarm........................................................................88
Auto Start Stop....................................................88
381
Index
J Fan Speed Control..............................................99

Heated Rear Window.........................................99
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................198 Max A/C...................................................................99
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................198 Max Defrost............................................................99
Jump Starting......................................................199 Power.......................................................................99
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................198 Rear Control Lock................................................99
Removing the Jumper Cables........................199 Rear Fan Speed Control....................................99
Rear Passenger Power.......................................99
K Rear Passenger Temperature Control.........99
Recirculated Air....................................................98
Keyless Starting..............................................121 Temperature Control..........................................99
Ignition Modes.......................................................121 Manual Liftgate...............................................42
Keys and Remote Controls.........................29 Closing the Liftgate.............................................42
Opening the Liftgate...........................................42
L Manual Seats..................................................110
Adjusting the Height of the Driver
Lane Keeping System.................................169 Seat......................................................................110
Switching the System On and Off................170 Adjusting the Lumbar Support of the Driver
Liftgate...............................................................42 Seat.......................................................................111
Lighting Control..............................................54 Moving the Seat Backward and
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............55 Forward..............................................................110
Headlamp High Beam........................................54 Recline Adjustment............................................110
Lighting..............................................................54 Manual Transmission.................................130
General Information............................................54 General Information..........................................130
Load Carriers Shifting Into Reverse Gear..............................130
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............184 Media Hub......................................................282
Load Carrying.................................................184 Message Center
General Information..........................................184 See: Information Displays..................................77
Locking and Unlocking.................................39 Mirrors
Autolock..................................................................40 See: Windows and Mirrors................................62
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Mobile Communications Equipment........11
Key........................................................................40 Moonroof...........................................................67
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Bounce-Back.........................................................68
Key - Vehicles with Central Locking..........41 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................38
Opening the Luggage Compartment............41 MyKey™.............................................................34
Power Door Locks................................................39 Principle of Operation........................................34
Remote Control....................................................39
Using Passive Entry.............................................39 N
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................251 Navigation......................................................309
Map Mode............................................................309
M Navigation Map Updates.................................312
Navigation Menu.................................................310
Maintenance..................................................218
General Information..........................................218 O
Manual Climate Control..............................98
A/C............................................................................99 Off-Road Driving..........................................190
Air Distribution Control......................................99 After Off-Road Driving.....................................194
382
Index
Basic Off-road Driving Techniques..............192 Receiving Calls....................................................307

Crossing Obstacles............................................194 Smartphone Connectivity.............................308
Driving in Deep Snow........................................194 Text Messaging..................................................308
Driving in Mud......................................................193 Post-Crash Alert System.........................200
Driving in Sand.....................................................193 Power Door Locks
Hill Climbing.........................................................194 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................39
Off-Road Driving Aids.......................................192 Power Liftgate.................................................43
Off-road Screen..................................................192 Closing the Liftgate.............................................44
Terrain Management System (TMS)...........191 Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................44
Water Wading......................................................194 Using the Hands-Free Liftgate.......................44
Oil Check Power Seats......................................................111
See: Engine Oil Check......................................224 Power Steering Fluid Check.....................226
Opening and Closing the Hood...............218 Power Windows..............................................62
Closing the Hood................................................219 Anti-trap windows...............................................64
Opening the Hood..............................................218 Bounce-Back.........................................................64
Overhead Console.........................................119 Driver’s Door Switches.......................................62
Front and Rear Passengers’ Door
P Switches.............................................................63
Opening and Closing Other Windows
Parking Aids....................................................146 Automatically...................................................63
Principle of Operation.......................................146 Opening and Closing the Driver Side
Parking Brake.................................................139 Window Automatically.................................63
All Vehicles............................................................139 Resetting the Memory of the Electric
Vehicles With Automatic Windows - Vehicle with One Touch
Transmission...................................................139 Up/Down on Driver Side only.....................63
Vehicles With Manual Transmission...........139 Safety Mode...........................................................64
Passenger Airbag............................................27 Safety Switch for the Rear Windows............63
.....................................................................................2 7 Pre-Collision Assist......................................179
Passive Anti-Theft System........................46 Using the Pre-Collision Assist
Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................46 System..............................................................180
Coded Keys............................................................46 Puncture
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................46 See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................251
Principle of Operation........................................46
Passive Key Backup Position.....................33
PATS
R
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................46 Radio.................................................................281
Personalized Settings..................................84 Antenna..................................................................281
Chime deactivation.............................................84 Rear Axle..........................................................137
Languages..............................................................84 Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58
Measure units........................................................84 Rear Parking Aid...........................................146
MyKey.......................................................................84 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................147
Temperature units...............................................84 Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........104
Phone..............................................................304 Rear Air Distribution Control..........................106
During a Phone Call..........................................307 Rear Control Lock Indicator............................105
Making Calls........................................................306 Rear Fan Speed Control...................................105
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Rear Passenger Temperature
Time..................................................................304 Control..............................................................106
Phone Menu........................................................305 Vehicles with Aux A/C Only............................105
383
Index
Vehicles with Aux Heater and A/C..............106 Seatbelts...........................................................22

Rear Seats........................................................112 Principle of Operation.........................................22
Adjusting the Rear Seats...................................112 Seats.................................................................108
Rear View Camera........................................152 Security..............................................................46
Camera guidelines.............................................153 Settings............................................................313
Manual Zoom.......................................................155 Ambient Lighting................................................323
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................154 Bluetooth...............................................................315
Rear Camera Delay............................................155 Clock........................................................................315
Using the Rear View Camera System.........153 Display...................................................................324
Rear View Camera Emergency Assistance.....................................318
See: Rear View Camera....................................152 General...................................................................322
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52 Media Player.........................................................314
Rear Window Washer.........................................53 Mobile Apps..........................................................321
Recommended Towing Weights............186 Navigation.............................................................319
Reduced Engine Performance................190 Phone......................................................................315
Refueling..........................................................128 Radio.......................................................................318
Remote Control..............................................29 Sound......................................................................313
Car Finder................................................................33 Valet Mode...........................................................325
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................29 Vehicle....................................................................323
Intelligent Access Key........................................30 Voice Control.......................................................324
Replacing the Battery.........................................30 Wi-Fi........................................................................323
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................33 Side Airbags......................................................27
Removing a Headlamp...............................231 Side Curtain Airbags.....................................28
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............240 Sitting in the Correct Position.................108
Replacement Parts Snow Chains
Recommendation........................................10 See: Using Snow Chains..................................247
Collision Repairs....................................................10 Spare Wheel
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................251
Repairs.................................................................10 Special Notices................................................10
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10 Speed Control
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote See: Cruise Control............................................156
Control.............................................................33 Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Roadside Emergencies...............................197 Cruise Control.............................................163
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................184 Principle of Operation.......................................163
Load Carrying - Roof Loads............................184 Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter ............164
Running-In Using the Speed Limiter..................................163
See: Breaking-In.................................................190 Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise
Running Out of Fuel.....................................127 Control...........................................................165
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................127 Principle of Operation.......................................165
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature...................127 Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter ............166
Using the Speed Limiter..................................165
S Stability Control............................................142
Principle of Operation.......................................142
Safety Precautions.......................................126 Starter Switch
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................24 See: Ignition Switch...........................................120
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................24 Starting a Diesel Engine.............................122
Switching the Seatbelt Minder Off................25 Cold or Hot Engine..............................................122
Failure to Start.....................................................123
384
Index
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........120 Towing the Vehicle on Four

General Information..........................................120 Wheels..........................................................189
Steering............................................................178 All Vehicles...........................................................189
Electric Power Steering....................................178 Vehicles With Automatic
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With: Transmission...................................................189
Push Button Start......................................122 Towing..............................................................186
Unlocking the Steering Wheel.......................122 Traction Control.............................................141
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without: Principle of Operation........................................141
Push Button Start.......................................121 Traffic Sign Recognition..............................177
Steering Wheel...............................................48 Principle of Operation........................................177
Storage Compartments..............................119 Using Traffic Sign Recognition.......................178
Sunroof Transmission..................................................130
See: Moonroof.......................................................67 Transporting the Vehicle..........................200
Sun Visors..........................................................67 Trip Computer.................................................83
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................67 Average Fuel Consumption..............................84
Supplementary Restraints System.........26 Average Speed......................................................84
Principle of Operation........................................26 Digital Speedometer..........................................84
Switching Off the Engine...........................123 Distance to Empty...............................................83
Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................123 Instantaneous fuel consumption..................84
Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Odometer...............................................................84
SYNC™ 3........................................................284 Outside Air Temperature...................................84
General Information.........................................284 Resetting the trip computer............................84
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................325 Trip Odometer.......................................................84
Type Approvals.............................................367
T Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Blind Spot Information System...............374
Technical Specifications Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid
See: Capacities and Specifications............258 Range Radar...................................................369
Tire Care..........................................................242 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........247 Passive Anti-Theft System.......................370
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Monitoring System.......................................248 Radio Transceiver Module.........................373
How Temperature Affects the Tire Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Pressures.........................................................248 SYNC 3..............................................................376
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire
Procedure........................................................250 Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)................367
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
System..............................................................248 Wireless Charging.........................................375
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................242
Tow Ball...........................................................188
U
Driving with a trailer..........................................188 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L TDCi
Driving without a trailer....................................189 Bi-Turbo Diesel (156 kW/213 PS) (YN)
Maintenance........................................................189 /2.0L TDCi Diesel (132 kW/180 PS)
Tow Ball Hitch Assembly................................188 (YM)...............................................................219
Towing a Trailer.............................................186 Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
Towing Points................................................201 Diesel.............................................................220
385
Index
Under Hood Overview - 3.2L Vehicle Performance

Diesel.............................................................222 Specifications.............................................277
Unique Driving Characteristics................124 Vehicle Storage............................................240
USB Port.........................................................282 Battery....................................................................241
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................157 Body.......................................................................240
Automatic Cancellation..................................160 Brakes......................................................................241
Blocked Sensor....................................................161 Cooling system....................................................241
Canceling the Set Speed................................160 Engine....................................................................240
Changing the Set Speed.................................160 Fuel system.........................................................240
Detection Issues.................................................160 General..................................................................240
Following a Vehicle............................................158 Miscellaneous......................................................241
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................160 Removing Vehicle From Storage...................241
Overriding the Set Speed................................159 Tires.........................................................................241
Resuming the Set Speed................................160 Ventilation
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............158 See: Climate Control..........................................98
Setting the Gap Distance................................159 VIN
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control See: Vehicle Identification Number............264
Off.......................................................................160 Voice Control...................................................49
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.........................................................................157
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............162
W
System Not Available........................................161 Warning Lamps and Indicators..................71
Using Cruise Control....................................156 Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp.........................71
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................156 AdBlue Lamp..........................................................74
Switching Cruise Control On..........................156 Anti-Lock Braking System Warning
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................136 Lamp.....................................................................71
Using Hill Descent Control........................144 Automatic High Beam Lamp............................71
HDC Operation....................................................145 Auto Start-Stop Lamp.........................................71
Selecting HDC......................................................144 Battery Warning Lamp........................................72
Using Snow Chains......................................247 Blind Spot Monitor Indicator............................72
Vehicles with Stability Control......................247 Brake System Warning Lamp...........................72
Using Stability Control................................143 Cruise Control Indicator......................................72
Using Traction Control.................................141 Direction Indicator................................................72
Using Voice Recognition...........................290 Door Ajar Indicator...............................................72
Audio Voice Commands.................................290 Electronic Locking Differential.........................72
Climate Voice Commands..............................291 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Mobile App Voice Commands......................294 Lamp.....................................................................72
Navigation Voice Commands.......................293 Engine Oil Warning Lamp..................................72
Phone Voice Commands................................292 Fasten Rear Seat Belt Warning Lamp...........74
Voice Settings Commands............................295 Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp......................73
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators.............................73
V Front Airbag Warning Lamp.............................73
Front Fog Lamps Indicator................................73
Vehicle Care....................................................237 Frost Warning Lamp............................................73
Vehicle Dimensions....................................262 Glow Plug Indicator..............................................73
Vehicle Identification Number................264 High Beam Indicator............................................73
Vehicle Identification Plate......................264 Hill Descent Control.............................................73
Hood Ajar Warning Lamp..................................73
386
Index
Lane Keeping Aid Indicator...............................73

Liftgate Ajar Warning Lamp..............................73
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................74
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................74
Low Washer Fluid.................................................74
Over Speed Warning...........................................74
Parking Lamps Indicator....................................74
Powertrain Fault....................................................74
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator.................................74
Service Engine Soon............................................74
Shift Indicator........................................................74
Speed Limiter.........................................................75
Stability Control Off Indicator..........................75
Stability Control Warning Lamp.....................75
Traffic Sign Recognition Road Condition
Indicator..............................................................75
Traffic Sign Recognition Speed Limit
Indicator..............................................................75
Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp..........................75
Warning Triangle...........................................197
Washer Fluid Check....................................226
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................237
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................251
Wheels and Tires.........................................242
General Information..........................................242
Technical Specifications.................................256
Windows and Mirrors....................................62
Windshield Washers.....................................52
Front Camera Washer........................................52
Windshield Wipers..........................................51
Intermittent Wipe..................................................51
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................51
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................230
Wipers and Washers......................................51
387

U375 Everest ASEAN 2018 TEC OM enPHI JB3B19A321EKA.v1 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

U375 Everest ASEAN 2018 TEC OM enPHI JB3B19A321EKA.v1 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FORD EVEREST Owner's Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Passive Key Backup Position ....................33

Automatic High Beam Control ................56 Seats

Transmission Using Cruise Control ...................................156

Hill Descent Control Driving Hints

Post-Crash Alert System ........................200 Vehicle Care

Maintenance Wheels and Tires

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

Brake fluid - non petroleum Fasten seatbelt

Brake system Front airbag

Cabin air filter Front fog lamps

Check fuel cap Fuse compartment

Child safety door lock or unlock Hazard flashers

Child seat lower anchor Heated rear window

Child seat tether anchor Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartment

Lock rear window

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Parking brake In general, this technical information

Additional functions contractually agreed Collision Repairs

REPLACEMENT PARTS Warranty on Replacement Parts

One of the best ways for you to make sure

Using mobile communications equipment

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

A Air vents. F Cruise control switches. See

K Steering wheel adjustment lever. M Rear climate control. See

A Air vents. E Instrument cluster. See

J Ignition switch. See Ignition

GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Infants or Children weighing 18 kg or less (generally Use a child safety seat

Note: When possible, always properly

INSTALLING CHILD WARNINGS

Note: Read and follow the manufacturer’s

Child Restraints for Different Mass

Baby Safety Seat

Child Safety Seat WARNINGS

See Head Restraints (page 108).

Booster Seat (Group 2)

Secure children that weigh between 13 kg

Booster Cushion (Group 3) Top Tether Anchor Points

ISOFIX Anchor Points

WARNINGS 3. Tighten the tether strap in line with the

See Head Restraints (page 108).

Mass Group Categories

0–10 kg 0–13 kg 9–18 kg 15–25 kg 22–36 kg

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

Note: When using a child restraint on a

ISOFIX Child Restraints

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)

The childproof locks are on the rear edge

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

WARNINGS Seatbelts should be adjusted as

WARNINGS Second-Row Seats

devices from operating to remove slack or

Note: Make sure that the seatbelt tongue

Pull the seatbelt out steadily. It may lock

Press the red button on the buckle to